2005 Saturn VUE Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,
you or others could be hurt.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the
page number where it can be found.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or “Do Not
let this happen.”
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We
use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things
that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But
the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the following
topics:
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in
different words.
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
• Features and Controls in Section 2
• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
• Climate Controls in Section 3
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Lift the bar located under the front of the seat to unlock
it. Slide the seat to where you want it and release
the bar. Try to move the seat with your body to be sure
the seat is locked in place.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has a driver’s seat height adjuster, it is
located on the outboard side of the seat near the front of
the seat cushion.
Driver Seat Height Adjuster
To raise the seat, move the lever upward repetitively
until the seat is at the desired height. To lower the seat,
move the lever downward repetitively until the seat is
at the desired height.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has this feature, the control is located on
the outboard side of the driver’s seat. To adjust the
seat do any of the following:
Six-Way Power Driver Seat
• Move the seat forward or rearward by moving the
control forward or rearward.
• Raise or lower the front portion of the seat by
sliding the front of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear portion of the seat by sliding
the rear of the control up or down.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Lumbar
Heated Seats
If your vehicle has this feature, the knob is located on
the front of the driver seat lower cushion.
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase
or decrease the lumbar support.
Your vehicle may have heated seats. The switches are
located below the climate control system.
Press 1 to warm the seat. Press 2 for a higher
temperature setting. To turn this feature off, move the
switch to the center position.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reclining Seatbacks
To recline the seatback, lift the lever on the outboard
side of the seat and move the seatback to where
you want it. Then release the lever to lock the seatback
in place.
But do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Head Restraints
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it
will not be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position
reduces the chances of a neck injury in a crash.
The reclining lever is also used to fold the front
passenger’s seatback forward. See Passenger Folding
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Folding Seatback
{CAUTION:
The front passenger’s seatback folds flat. To fold the
seatback, do the following:
If you fold the seatback forward to carry longer
objects, such as skis, be sure any such cargo
is not near an airbag. In a crash, an inflating
airbag might force that object toward a person.
This could cause severe injury or even death.
Secure objects away from the area in which an
airbag would inflate. For more information, see
1. Lift the bar under the seat to unlock it.
2. Slide the seat as far back as it will go and release
the bar. Try to move the seat back and forth to
make sure it is locked into place.
3. Lift the recliner lever, located on the outboard side
of the seat, and fold the seat forward until the
seatback disengages. Continue to fold the seat
forward until it locks in the folded position. Pull up
on the seatback to be sure it is locked.
{CAUTION:
Things you put on this seatback can strike and
injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a
crash. Remove or secure all items before
driving.
The recliner lever is also used to recline the seatback
while a passenger is seated. See Reclining Seatbacks
on page 1-6.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Seats
{CAUTION:
Split Folding Rear Seat
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
The rear split bench seatbacks have three available
positions — folded forward, upright, or partially reclined.
Each of the rear seatbacks can be moved to any of
the three positions independent of the other seatback
position.
{CAUTION:
Prior to lowering the seatback, ensure all three of the
seatbelts are unbuckled and the front seats are not
reclined.
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she can not
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
Lift the lever on the upper back corner of the seatback
to move it to the desired position and then release
it. Push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is locked
in place.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.
{CAUTION:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter...a lot!
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up. See
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an
accident — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident
if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you are upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
wear safety belts?
This part is only for people of adult size.
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
those rules for everyone’s protection.
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that has
airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
First, you will want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
Driver Position
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the height
that is right for you. See Shoulder Belt Height
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would
be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
at the abdomen, not at the pelvic bones, and
that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be
sure the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt height
adjuster to the height that is right for you.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be
away from your face and neck, but not falling off your
shoulder.
To move it down, squeeze
the release button and
move the height adjuster
to the desired position. You
can move the height
adjuster up just by pushing
up on the shoulder belt
guide.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
After you move the height adjuster to where you want it,
try to move it down without squeezing the release
button to make sure it has locked into position.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt — except for one
thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out
all the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all
the way and start again.
Rear Seat Passengers
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the
latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle it.
All rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here
is how to wear one properly.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a
crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of
the retractor.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would
be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
If you would like to have rear shoulder belt comfort
guides installed on your vehicle, contact your retailer.
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide
added safety belt comfort for older children who have
outgrown booster seats and for some adults. When
installed on a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions
the belt away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position
in the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort
guide and use the safety belt:
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage
clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn
the guide and clip inward and slide them in between the
seatback and the interior body, leaving only the loop
of the elastic cord exposed.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the driver
and right front passenger. Although you cannot see
them, they are located on the retractor part of the safety
belts. They help the safety belts reduce a person’s
forward movement in a moderate to severe frontal or
near frontal crash.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Extender
Child Restraints
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
Older Children
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your retailer will
order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and
use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has
been designed for adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information see the instruction sheet
that comes with the extender.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window, move
the child toward the center of the vehicle. If the child
is sitting in the center rear seat passenger position,
move the child toward the safety belt buckle. In either
case, be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the
child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper
body would have the restraint that belts provide. If
the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very
close to the child’s face or neck, you might want to
place the child in a seat that has a lap belt, if your
vehicle has one.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a
baby will become so heavy it is not possible to
hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
{CAUTION:
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This
is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck
is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the
restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
always should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and
some high-back booster seats have a five-point harness.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system or
the LATCH system in your vehicle, but the child also
has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the
chance of personal injury. When securing an add-on
child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not available,
obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people
in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle – even when no child is in it.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps that
come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and
buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and a
crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the
child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where to Put the Restraint
CAUTION: (Continued)
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We,
therefore, recommend that child restraints be secured
in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing
infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat and an older child riding in a booster seat. Never
put a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger
seat. Here is why:
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
{CAUTION:
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a
rear seat.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.” It
can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored to
the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap being
anchored. Others require the top strap always to be
anchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint. If yours requires that the top strap
be anchored, do not use the restraint unless it is
anchored properly.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.
Anchor the top strap to an anchor point specified in Top
an anchor point located on the same side of the vehicle
as the seating position where the child restraint will
be placed.
If the position you are using has an adjustable head
restraint, raise the head restraint and route the top strap
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Top Strap Anchor Location
{CAUTION:
Each top tether bracket is designed to anchor
only one child restraint. Attaching more than
one child restraint to a single bracket could
cause the anchor to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others could be
injured if this happens. To help prevent injury
to people and damage to your vehicle, attach
only one child restraint per bracket.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you will be
ready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
Your vehicle has top strap anchors for the rear seating
positions. The anchors are located on the back of
the rear seatback. Be sure to use an anchor point
located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating
position where the child restraint will be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger’s position if a national or local law requires
that the top strap be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored. There is no place to anchor the top
strap in this position.
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. There are anchors
for each rear seating position.
This system, designed to make installation of child
restraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.
Instead, it uses vehicle anchors and child restraint
attachments to secure the restraints. Some restraints
also use another vehicle anchor to secure a top
tether strap.
A. Lower Anchorage
B. Lower Anchorage
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint designed for that system.
To assist you in locating the lower anchorages for this
child restraint system, each seating position with
the LATCH system has visible metal anchors in the seat
where the seatback meets the seat cushion.
A. Lower Anchorage
B. Lower Anchorage
C. Top Tether
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seating
position you want to use, where the bottom of the
seatback meets the back of the seat cushion.
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to its anchorage points, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured or
killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type child
restraint is properly installed using the
anchorage points, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on the
child restraint to the LATCH anchorages in the
vehicle. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage.
The child restraint instructions will show you
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
tether from the top tether anchorage and then
disconnect the LATCH attachments from the LATCH
anchorages.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
on page 1-40 if the child restraint has one.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. The safety belts in the rear outside seating positions
have a child restraint locking feature. If you are
using a rear outside seating position, pull the rest of
the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor
to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here is why:
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
{CAUTION:
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
on page 1-40 if the child restraint has one.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a
rear seat.
There is no top strap anchor in the right front
passenger’s position. Do not secure a child seat in this
position if a national or local law requires that the
top strap be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag. Never
put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat.
A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing
child restraint. If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat, you will be using the
lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when
and as the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger
airbag, always move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing a forward-facing child restraint.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver and
another frontal airbag for the right front passenger. Your
vehicle may also have roof mounted side impact
airbags. Roof mounted side impact airbags are available
for the driver and the passenger seated directly behind
the driver and for the right front passenger and the
passenger seated directly behind that passenger.
If your vehicle has side impact airbags, the words AIR
BAG will appear on the airbag covering on the
ceiling near the driver’s and right front passenger’s
window.
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating frontal airbag.
But these airbags must inflate very quickly to do their
job and comply with federal regulations.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. You may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
CAUTION: (Continued)
The roof-mounted side impact airbags are
designed to inflate in moderate to severe
crashes where something hits the side of your
vehicle. They are not designed to inflate in
frontal, in rollover or in rear crashes. Everyone
in your vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag
for that person.
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags are
designed to work with safety belts but do not
replace them.
Frontal airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy in moderate
to severe frontal and near frontal crashes.
They are not designed to inflate in rollover,
rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or in many
side crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, frontal airbags may provide less
protection in frontal crashes than more
forceful airbags have provided in the past.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact airbags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an
eye. If you are too close to an inflating airbag,
as you would be if you were leaning forward, it
could seriously injure you. Safety belts help
keep you in position for airbag inflation before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt even with frontal airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while still
maintaining control of the vehicle. Occupants
should not lean on or sleep against the door.
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for the driver
and the person seated directly behind the driver, it is in
the ceiling above the side windows.
If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for the right
front passenger and the person seated directly behind
that passenger, it is in the ceiling above the side
windows.
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
{CAUTION:
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account
a variety of desired deployment and non-deployment
events and are used to predict how severe a crash
is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags
will or should deploy is not based on how fast your
vehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact and how quickly your
vehicle slows down.
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag,
and do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering. And, if your vehicle has
roof-mounted side impact airbags, never
secure anything to the roof of your vehicle by
routing the rope or tiedown through any door
or window opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating side impact airbag will be blocked.
The path of an inflating airbag must be
kept clear.
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal airbags,
which adjust the restraint according to crash severity.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontal sensors
which help the sensing system distinguish between a
moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal
impact. For moderate frontal impacts, these airbags
inflate at a level less than full deployment. For
more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that
does not move or deform, the threshold level for the
reduced deployment is about 10 to 15 mph
(16 to 24 km/h), and the threshold level for a full
deployment is about 15 to 25 mph (24 to 40 km/h).
(The threshold level can vary, however, with specific
vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above
or below this range.)
Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger) are not
intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation
would not likely help the occupants.
Your vehicle may or may not have side impact airbags.
airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe
side crashes. A side impact airbag will inflate if the crash
severity is above the system’s designed “threshold
level.” The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle
design. Side impact airbags are not designed to
inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers or rear
impacts, because inflation would not likely help the
occupant. A side impact airbag will only deploy on the
side of the vehicle that is struck.
Airbags may inflate at different crash speeds. For
example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbag
could inflate at a different crash speed than if
the object were moving.
• If the object deforms, the airbag could inflate at a
different crash speed than if the object does not
deform.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle
slows down in frontal or near-frontal impacts. For side
impact airbags, inflation is determined by the location
and severity of the impact.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the
airbag could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the
airbag could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For
both frontal and side impact airbags, the sensing system
triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which
inflates the airbag. The inflator, airbag, and related
hardware are all part of the airbag modules inside the
steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the
right front passenger. For vehicles with side impact
airbags, the airbag modules are located in the ceiling of
the vehicle, near the side windows.
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the
frontal airbags would not help you in many types
of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward the airbag. Side impact airbags would not
help you in many types of collisions, including frontal
or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
those airbags. Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and
then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s
frontal airbags, and only in moderate to severe
side collisions for vehicles with a driver’s and right front
passenger’s side impact airbag.
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
{CAUTION:
After the airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may not even realize the airbag
inflated. Some components of the airbag module will be
hot for a short time. These components include the
steering wheel hub for the driver’s frontal airbag and the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. For vehicles with side impact airbags, the ceiling
of your vehicle near the side windows will be hot. The
parts of the bag that come into contact with you may be
warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be some
smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated
airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from
seeing or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it
stop people from leaving the vehicle.
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag deployment, you
should seek medical attention.
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle may have a feature that will automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior dome lamp on
and flash the daytime running lights on and off when the
airbags inflate (if battery power is available). You can
lock the doors again and turn the interior lamps off
by using the door lock and interior lamp controls. You
must first, however, turn your ignition key to the following
ignition switch positions:
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information after
a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event
• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag
system. Improper service can mean that your
airbag system will not work properly. See your
Saturn retailer for service.
1. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
2. Turn the ignition key to RUN.
3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s airbag, or the side
impact airbag covering on the ceiling near the side
windows, the airbag may not work properly. You
may have to replace the airbag module in the
steering wheel, both the airbag module and the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s
airbag, or side impact airbag module and ceiling
covering for roof-mounted side impact airbags. Do
not open or break the airbag coverings.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
your airbag system. If you do not get them,
the airbag system will not be there to help protect
you in another crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly other parts. The
service manual for your vehicle covers the need to
replace other parts.
1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are airbag system parts in several places around
your vehicle. You do not want the system to inflate
while someone is working on your vehicle. Your Saturn
retailer and the Saturn Service Manual have information
about servicing your vehicle and the airbag system.
To purchase a service manual, see Service Publications
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
{CAUTION:
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
For up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an
airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system was not being used at the time of
the collision.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need to replace
the driver and front passenger’s safety belt retractor
assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new retractor
assembly will be there to help protect you in a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver and
front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies, even
if the frontal airbags have not deployed. The driver
and front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies
contain the safety belt pretensioners. Have your
safety belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has
been in a collision, or if your airbag readiness light stays
on after you start your vehicle or while you are driving.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need
new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
1-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
1-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. The
children or others could be badly injured or
even killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
One key is used for the ignition and all of the locks.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Key code information can be obtained only at the retailer
where your vehicle was purchased. These code
numbers can be used to make new keys. Additional
keys that are needed can be made at any retail service
facility provided you have the key code information.
Store this information in a safe place, but not in
your vehicle.
The remote keyless entry system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
Have extra keys made. Your service parts department
can make extra keys for you.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar® System
with an active subscription and you lock your keys inside
the vehicle, OnStar® may be able to unlock your
information.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
With this feature, you can lock and unlock the doors
from about 32 feet (10 m) away using the remote
keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle.
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
Q(Lock): Press this
button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter to
lock the doors. This also
arms the theft-deterrent
system. See
“Theft-Deterrent System”
following for information on
arming the theft-deterrent
system.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement or
resynchronization is necessary. See “Battery
Replacement” and “Resynchronization” under
page 2-4.
• If you are still having trouble, see your Saturn
retailer or authorized service provider for service.
Your vehicle can be programmed so that the parking
lamps or Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) will flash
and/or the horn will sound when you lock the doors with
the remote keyless entry transmitter. See your retailer
for more information on programming this feature.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
" (Unlock): Press this button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter to unlock the driver’s door. This
also disarms the theft-deterrent system. See
“Theft-Deterrent System” following for information on
disarming the theft-deterrent system. Press the button
again within 5 seconds to unlock the rest of the doors.
Theft-Deterrent System
The remote keyless entry transmitter is used to
arm/disarm the theft-deterrent system. Your vehicle’s
theft-deterrent system can be programmed to three
different modes.
Active Arming: The system will arm when the lock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is
pressed. The system will disarm when the unlock button
is pressed.
Your vehicle can be programmed so that the parking
lamps or DRL will flash and/or the horn will sound when
you unlock the doors with the remote keyless entry
transmitter. See your retailer for more information on
programming this feature.
Passive Arming: The system will arm itself one minute
after the ignition is turned off and the driver’s door
has been opened and closed. If the lock button on the
transmitter is pressed before the minute has passed, the
system will arm immediately. The system will disarm
when the unlock button is pressed.
L(Panic Alarm): Press the button with the horn
symbol when the ignition is turned off. The horn
will sound and the parking lamps or DRL and dome
lamp will flash for up to two minutes. To stop the panic
alarm, press this button again.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security System Disable: The system will not arm.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
To change the mode that your vehicle is programmed to,
do the following:
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your retailer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your retailer. When the retailer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your retailer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of
four transmitters matched to it.
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACC.
2. Press the panic alarm button on the transmitter
slowly four times within five seconds.
3. You must complete one of the following within
three seconds to change the mode.
• To select the active arming mode, press the lock
button on the transmitter.
• To select the passive arming mode, press the
lock button on the transmitter twice within
3 seconds.
• To select the security system disable mode,
press the unlock button on the transmitter.
A chime will sound once the mode has been selected.
If you accidentally set off the alarm when entering/exiting
the vehicle, you can shut it off by pressing any button
on the remote keyless entry transmitter other than
the panic alarm button.
If you hear three horn chirps when you press the unlock
button on the transmitter, that means the vehicle’s
alarm was triggered while you were away.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Once the transmitter is separated, use a pencil or
similar object to remove the old battery. Do not use
a metal object.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about four years.
3. Insert the new battery as the instructions under the
cover indicate.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will not
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it is probably time to change the battery.
4. Snap the transmitter back together tightly to be sure
no moisture can enter.
5. Check the operation of the transmitter.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
If the transmitter does not work, try synchronizing your
transmitter with your receiver. See “Resynchronization”
for more information.
1. Use a flat thin object to pry open the transmitter.
Resynchronization
This is used to keep the transmitter of the vehicle
communicating with the receiver of the vehicle.
Resynchronization may be required due to the security
method used by this system.
Your vehicle has an automatic resynchronization
function built into the system. If your transmitter is not
working properly and you have to manually
resynchronize, press the lock and unlock buttons at the
same time for seven seconds while you are near
your vehicle. The doors will lock or unlock, depending
on their starting position. If they do not, contact
your retailer for service.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
Doors and Locks
From the outside, turn the key towards the front of
the vehicle to lock the door and towards the rear of the
vehicle to unlock it or use the remote keyless entry
transmitter, if equipped.
Door Locks
From the inside, move the lock control on the door or
use the power door lock switch, if equipped.
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Power Door Locks
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle will not open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors are not locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
If your vehicle has power
door locks, the switches are
located on the driver’s and
front passenger’s doors.
Press the bottom of the
switch to lock all doors.
Press the top of the switch
to unlock all doors.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Delayed Locking
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
A chime will sound three times to indicate a door or
liftgate is open when you try to lock the doors with the
remote keyless entry transmitter or the power door
lock switch. The doors will not lock, and the
theft-deterrent system will not arm until all the doors are
closed and five seconds have passed.
For a vehicle with an automatic transaxle, all the doors
will lock when the ignition is in RUN and the shift
lever is moved out of PARK (P). For a vehicle with a
manual transaxle, all the doors will lock when the vehicle
reaches a speed of more than 3 mph (5 km/h). All
doors must be closed.
The delayed locking feature can be overridden by
pressing the lock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter, or the door lock switch, a second time. The
doors will lock immediately and when all doors are
closed the theft-deterrent system will arm after
30 seconds.
In the following situations, all doors will lock
again when:
• The brake pedal is applied, a door is opened and
then closed, and the brake pedal is released, for
a vehicle with an automatic transaxle.
To get the horn to chirp if a door was open during the
arming process, you must press the lock button on your
transmitter twice after the doors are closed.
• A door is opened and then closed while the vehicle
is moving faster than 3 mph (5 km/h), for a vehicle
with an manual transaxle.
For a vehicle with an automatic transaxle, all doors will
unlock when the shift lever is moved into PARK (P).
For a vehicle with a manual transaxle, all doors
will unlock when the key is removed from the ignition.
The unlocking feature can be programmed on or
off by turning the ignition to RUN, engine not running,
and pressing the unlock part of the power door lock
switch for eight seconds. The horn will chirp once when
this feature is on and will chirp twice when it is off.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you want to open a rear door when the security
lock is on, do the following:
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle has rear door security locks that prevent
passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside.
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry
transmitter, the power door lock switch, or by
lifting the rear door manual lock.
The rear door security
locks are located on the
inside edge of each
rear door.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the slot next to the rear door
security lock label and turn it counterclockwise for
the driver’s side and clockwise for the
passenger’s side.
Lockout Protection
If you press the power door lock switch when the key is
in the ignition and any door is open, all the doors will
lock and then the driver’s door will unlock. Be sure
to remove the key from the ignition when locking your
vehicle.
To set the rear door security locks, do the following:
1. Insert the key into the lock above the rear door
security lock label and turn it clockwise for the
driver’s side and counterclockwise for the
passenger’s side.
If the keyless entry transmitter is used to lock the doors
and the key is in the ignition, a chime will sound
three times. All doors will lock.
2. Close the door.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicles with Power Door Locks
Liftgate
Use your remote keyless entry transmitter or power
door locks to unlock the liftgate. To open it, lift the
handle located in the center of the liftgate.
{CAUTION:
Vehicles with Manual Door Locks
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the liftgate
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the liftgate:
The liftgate will lock when the shift lever is moved out of
PARK (P). Your key will unlock the liftgate. To open
it, lift the handle located in the center of the liftgate.
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
Manual Windows
If your vehicle has manual windows, use the window
crank to open and close each window.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-Down Window
Power Windows
The driver’s window switch has an express-down
feature that is labeled AUTO. Press the switch all the
way down and hold it there momentarily, and the driver’s
window will go all the way down. To stop the automatic
function, lift the switch all the way up and release it.
If your vehicle has this
feature the switches are
located on each side of the
shift lever on the console.
Window Lock Out
The driver’s window controls also include a lock-out
switch. Press the window lock switch to the left to stop
rear passengers from using their window switches.
The driver can still control all the windows with the lock
on. Press the right side of the window lock button to
return to normal window operation.
To open a window press the switch down and lift up to
close it.
Sun Visors
To block out glare swing the visors down or to the side.
The power windows can operate only when the ignition
key is in RUN or ACC.
Visor Vanity Mirrors
A rear window switch is located on each rear door.
Press the bottom half of the switch to open the window
and the top to close it.
Your vehicle has covered visor vanity mirrors.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
During normal operation, the security light will go off
approximately five seconds after the key is turned
to RUN following an engine start.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
If the engine stalls and the security light flashes, wait
until the light stops flashing before trying to restart
the engine. Remember to release the key from START
as soon as the engine starts.
Passlock®
Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock®
theft-deterrent system.
If the engine is running and the security light comes on,
you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the
engine off. However, your Passlock® system is
not working properly and must be serviced by your
retailer. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock® at
this time. You may also want to check the fuses,
retailer for service. Also, see Roadside Assistance
This light will come on for
the theft-deterent system.
Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system.
Passlock® enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is
turned with a valid key. If a correct key is not used or the
ignition lock cylinder is tampered with, fuel is disabled.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ignition Positions
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Do not drive at any one speed, fast or slow, for
the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not make
full-throttle starts.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new
brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear
and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake
linings.
With the key in the ignition switch, you can turn it to four
different positions.
LOCKq: This position locks your steering column in a
vehicle with a manual transaxle. It is a theft-deterrent
feature. You will only be able to remove your key when
the ignition is turned to LOCK.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have an automatic transaxle, the ignition switch
cannot be turned to LOCK unless the shift lever is
in PARK (P).
ACC (Accessory): This position operates some of your
electrical accessories. It unlocks the steering wheel
and ignition.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
your hand. Make sure the key is all the way in. If
it is, turn the steering wheel left and right while you
turn the key hard. If none of this works, then
your vehicle needs service.
RUN: This is the position the switch returns to after you
start your engine and release the switch. The switch
stays in RUN when the engine is running. But even
when the ignition is not running, you can use RUN to
operate your electrical accessories and to display some
warning and indicator lights.
rSTART: This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch
will return to RUN for normal driving.
{CAUTION:
A warning tone will sound if you open the driver’s door
when the key has not been removed from the ignition.
If you have a manual transaxle removing the
key from the ignition switch will lock the
steering column and result in a loss of ability
to steer the vehicle. This could cause a
collision. If you need to turn the engine off
while the vehicle is moving, turn the key
to ACC.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If it does not start, wait about 15 seconds and try
again to start the engine by turning the ignition to
START. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.
Starting the Engine
Automatic Transaxle
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position — that is
a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
When your engine has run about 10 seconds to
warm up, your vehicle is ready to be driven. Do not
run your engine at high speed when it is cold.
If the weather is below freezing (32°F or 0°C), let
the engine run for a few minutes to warm up.
Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehicle
moving could damage the transaxle. Shift into
PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.
3. If your engine still will not start, or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do the same thing,
but this time keep the pedal down for five or
six seconds. This clears the extra gasoline from the
engine.
Manual Transaxle
The shift lever should be in NEUTRAL and the parking
brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor and
start the engine. Your vehicle will not start if the clutch
pedal is not all the way down — that is a safety feature.
Starting Procedure
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition to START. When the engine starts, let go
of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Heater
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has this feature, in very cold weather
0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine coolant heater
can help. You will get easier starting and better fuel
economy during engine warm-up. Usually, the coolant
heater should be plugged in a minimum of four
hours prior to starting your vehicle. At temperatures
above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant heater is not
required.
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. If
your vehicle is equipped with a four-cylinder
engine, the cord is located near the air cleaner
assembly. If your vehicle is equipped with a
six-cylinder engine, the cord is located between the
windshield washer fluid reservoir and coolant
reservoir.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your retailer in the area where you will be parking
your vehicle. The retailer can give you the best advice
for that particular area.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transaxle Operation
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transaxle,
the shift lever is located on the console between
the seats.
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
There are several different
positions for the automatic
transaxle.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic
PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting
the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle
shift lock control system. You have to fully apply
your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)
when the ignition key is in RUN. If you cannot shift
out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
lever — push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P)
and also release the shift lever button as you maintain
brake application. Then move the shift lever into the
gear you wish. Press the shift lever button before
moving the shift lever. See Shifting Out of Park (P)
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
while the engine is running at high speed may
damage the transaxle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speeds when shifting your vehicle.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see If
on page 4-44.
Notice: Shifting to a drive gear from NEUTRAL (N)
while the vehicle is moving could damage the
transaxle. Make sure the vehicle is stopped before
shifting from NEUTRAL (N) into a drive gear.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for
normal driving with the automatic transaxle. If you need
more power for passing, and you are:
LOW (L): This position gives you even more power but
lower fuel economy than INTERMEDIATE (I). You
can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud.
If the shift lever is put in LOW (L), the transaxle will
not shift into Low gear until the vehicle is going slowly
enough.
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator all the way down.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transaxle. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes, or parking brake to hold the vehicle
in place.
INTERMEDIATE (I): This position is also used for
normal driving. However, it offers braking from
the engine for slight downgrades where the vehicle
would otherwise accelerate due to steepness of grade.
If repetitive shifts occur between third and fourth
gears on steep uphills, this position can be used to
prevent repetitive shifting. Fuel economy will be lower
than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D). Here are some
times you might choose INTERMEDIATE (I) instead of
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D):
• When driving on hilly, winding roads.
• When towing a trailer, so there is less shifting
between gears.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on
the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
Manual Transaxle Operation
Five-Speed
This is your shift pattern.
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5): Shift into
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5), the same way
you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the clutch
pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the
brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press
the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to
NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or idle
your engine.
REVERSE (R): To back up, press down the clutch
pedal and shift into REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch
pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal.
Here is how to operate your transaxle:
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are going less
than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you have come to a complete
stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the shift
lever in NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch. Press
the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1).
Also, use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake,
for parking your vehicle.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Up-Shift Light
Shift Speeds
If you have a manual
transaxle, you may have
an up-shift light. This
light will show you when to
shift to the next higher
gear for the best fuel
economy.
{CAUTION:
If you skip a gear when you downshift, you
could lose control of your vehicle. You could
injure yourself or others. Do not shift down
more than one gear at a time when you
downshift.
United States Only
When this light comes on, you can shift to the next
higher gear if weather, road and traffic conditions let you.
For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly and shift
when the light comes on.
While you accelerate, it is normal for the light to go on
and off if you quickly change the position of the
accelerator. Ignore the light when you downshift.
Notice: If you skip more than one gear when you
downshift, or if you race the engine when you
release the clutch pedal while downshifting, you
could damage the engine, clutch, driveshaft or the
transaxle. Do not skip gears or race the engine when
downshifting.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down
and pull up on the parking brake lever. If the ignition is
on, the brake system warning light will come on.
Parking Brake
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can press
the release button. Hold the release button in as you
move the brake lever all the way down.
Make sure to release the parking brake before driving
the vehicle.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
The parking brake lever is located to the right of the
driver’s seat.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
Shifting Into Park (P)
(Automatic Transaxle)
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow. If you are
page 4-55.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move
the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pushing
the button. If you can, it means that the shift lever
was not fully locked into PARK (P).
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking
brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holding the
button on the shift lever and pushing the lever all
the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Torque Lock
Shifting Out of Park (P)
(Automatic Transaxle)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P)
Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when
the ignition is in RUN. See Automatic Transaxle
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever — push the shift lever all the way
into PARK (P), as you maintain brake application. Then
move the shift lever into the gear you wish. (Press
the shift lever button before moving the shift lever).
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you
can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
Parking Your Vehicle
(Manual Transaxle)
Before leaving your vehicle, fully press the clutch pedal
in, move the shift lever into REVERSE (R), and firmly
apply the parking brake. Once the shift lever has
been placed in REVERSE (R) with the clutch pedal
pressed in, you can turn the ignition key to LOCK,
remove the key and release the clutch.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see
or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and
death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
{CAUTION:
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other
things that can burn.
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Engine While Parked
{CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
on page 2-25.
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature and Compass Display
Mirrors
Press the on/off button, located to the far left, briefly to
turn the comp/temp display on or off.
Manual Rearview Mirror
If the display reads CAL, the compass needs to be
calibrated. See the information following on calibration.
When you are sitting in a comfortable driving position,
adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind your
vehicle. Grip the mirror in the center to move it up
or down and side to side. The day/night adjustment
allows you to adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the
lamps behind you. Pull the tab forward for daytime use;
push it back for night use.
To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius do the
following:
1. Press and hold the on/off button for approximately
four seconds until either a flashing °F, or °C
appears.
2. Press the button again to change the display to the
desired unit of measurement. After approximately
four seconds of inactivity, the new unit will be locked
in and the compass/temperature display will
return.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®, Compass and
Temperature Display
The vehicle may have this feature. When on, an
automatic dimming mirror automatically dims to the
proper level to minimize glare from lights behind
you after dark.
The mirror also includes a dual display in the upper
right corner of the mirror face. The compass reading and
the outside temperature will both appear in the display
at the same time.
P (On/Off): This is the on/off button.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
Compass Variance
The automatic dimming mirror function is turned
on automatically each time the ignition is started. To
operate the automatic dimming mirror do the following:
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if you live outside of
zone eight. Under certain circumstances, as during a
long distance cross-country trip, it will be necessary to
adjust for compass variance. Compass variance is
the difference between earth’s magnetic north and true
geographic north. If not adjusted to account for
compass variance, your compass could give false
readings.
1. Make sure the green indicator light, located to
the left of the on/off button, is lit. If it’s not, press
and hold the on/off button for approximately
six seconds until the green light comes on,
indicating that the mirror is in automatic
dimming mode.
2. Turn off the automatic dimming mirror function by
pressing and holding the on/off button for
approximately six seconds until the green indicator
light turns off.
To adjust for compass variance do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
Compass Calibration
The compass may need calibration from time to time.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the mirror
compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, push in
the on/off button for approximately nine seconds or until
CAL is displayed.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction, or the word CAL disappears.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Compass and Temperature
Display
If the vehicle has an automatic dimming mirror, it will
automatically dim to the proper level to minimize
glare from lights behind you after dark.
The mirror also includes a display in the upper right
corner of the mirror face. The compass reading and the
outside temperature will both appear in the display at
the same time.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zone
number appears in the display. The compass is now
in zone mode.
Temperature Display
3. Keep pressing the on/off button until the desired
zone number appears in the display. Release the
button. After approximately four seconds of
inactivity, the new zone number will be locked in
and the comp/temp display will return.
The temperature can be displayed by pressing the
TEMP button. Pressing the TEMP button once briefly,
will toggle the temperature reading from Fahrenheit (°F),
Celsius (°C), to off.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
Compass Variance
Press the COMP button to turn the automatic dimming
feature on and off. An indicator light on the bottom
of the mirror face will be on when the automatic dimming
feature is on.
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if you live outside
zone eight. Under certain circumstances, as during
a long distance cross-country trip, it will be necessary to
adjust for compass variance. Compass variance is
the difference between earth’s magnetic north and true
geographic north. If not adjusted to account for
compass variance, your compass could give false
readings.
Compass Operation
Press the COMP button once briefly to turn the compass
on or off.
When compass feature is on, the compass will show the
direction the vehicle is traveling, with a maximum of
two characters.
To adjust for compass variance:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
Compass Calibration
The compass may need calibration from time to time.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the mirror
compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, push in
the COMP button for approximately six seconds or until
CAL is displayed.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction, or the word CAL disappears.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the Mirror
Use a paper towel or similar material dampened with
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the
mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter
the mirror housing.
Outside Manual Mirrors
The manual outside rearview mirrors are adjusted by
moving the mirror glass by hand. Adjust each mirror so
that the side of the vehicle can be seen when sitting
in a comfortable driving position.
2. Press and hold the COMP button for five seconds
until a zone number appears in the display.
3. Press the COMP button on the bottom of the mirror
until the new zone number appears in the display.
After you stop pressing the button, the display
will show a compass direction within a few seconds.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Power Mirrors
Outside Convex Mirror
If the vehicle has this
feature, the controls are
located on the driver’s side
of the vehicle next to the
shift lever.
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from the
driver’s seat. It also makes things appear farther
away than they really are.
Move the selector switch to the left or right to choose
the mirror to be adjusted; then press the four-way control
pad to adjust the direction of the mirror.
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® System
Safe and Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Emergency Services
OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite
technology, wireless communications, and state of
the art call centers to provide you with a wide range of
safety, security, information, and convenience
services.
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Tracking
• AccidentAssist
A complete OnStar® user’s guide and the terms and
conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
Agreement are included in the OnStar® equipped
vehicle’s glove box literature. For more information, visit
www.onstar.com or www.onstarcanada.com. Contact
OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827),
or press the OnStar® button to speak to an OnStar®
advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• Remote Diagnostics
• Online Concierge
Directions and Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions
Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service
Agreement can be found at www.onstar.com or
www.onstarcanada.com.
• RideAssist
OnStar® Services
• Information and Convenience Services
For new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe and
Sound Plan is included for the first year. You can
extend the plan beyond the first year, or upgrade to the
Directions and connections Plan to meet your needs.
For more information, press the OnStar® button to speak
with an advisor.
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® Personal Calling
Center Console Storage Area
As an OnStar® subscriber, the Personal Calling
capability is an available hands-free wireless phone that
is integrated into the vehicle. Calls can be placed
nationwide using simple voice commands with no
additional contracts and no additional roaming charges.
To find out more about OnStar® Personal Calling,
refer to the OnStar® user’s guide in the vehicle’s glove
box, visit www.onstar.com, or www.onstarcanada.com;
or speak with an OnStar® advisor by pressing the
OnStar® button or by calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827).
All models have a center console with storage area.
Cargo Area
All models have a cargo area storage box, which is
located in the rear of the vehicle. This storage space is
designed to hold small items.
Use the following procedure to access and assemble
the rear cargo organizer.
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar® Personal Calling
that uses minutes to access up-to-date weather and
traffic reports for your area, news and sports updates,
stock quotes, entertainment, and more. Customize
your information profile at www.myonstar.com. See the
OnStar® user’s guide for more information.
Storage Areas
1. Pull up on the latch of the rear panel lid of the
cargo organizer to open it.
Glove Box
2. Lift the front of the cargo organizer and fold out the
end panels.
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever.
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Rotate the end panels forward and snap them into
the rear panel lid.
5. Rotate the center divider rearward and snap it into
the panel lid.
4. Pull the center divider out from the rear panel lid.
6. Reverse the above steps to stow the dividers and
close the cargo organizer.
Make sure to push firmly on the rear panel lid to
engage the latch of the organizer.
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that
weighs more than 100 lbs (45 kg) or hangs over
the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your
vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on the slats
as far forward as possible and against the side rails,
making sure to fasten it securely.
Roof Rack System
If your vehicle is equipped with a roof rack system.
{CAUTION:
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
page 4-46.
If you try to carry something on top of your
vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage
carrier — like paneling, plywood, a mattress
and so forth — the wind can catch it as you
drive along. This can cause you to lose
control. What you are carrying could be
violently torn off, and this could cause you or
other drivers to have a collision, and of course
damage your vehicle. You may be able to carry
something like this inside. But, never carry
something longer or wider than the luggage
carrier on top of your vehicle.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re driving,
check frequently to ensure your cargo is securely
fastened.
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To stop the sunroof before it is completely open, press
the switch rearward again. The sunshade cannot be
closed with the sunroof open. To close the sunroof,
press forward on the switch until it stops.
Sunroof
If the vehicle has an express-open sunroof, the controls
to operate it are located on the headliner above the
rearview mirror. The ignition must be in RUN or ACC to
page 2-15.
To put the sunroof in the vent position, pull down on the
front of the switch. Push up on the front of the switch
to close it.
To express-open the
sunroof glass panel and
sunshade, press the switch
rearward and release it.
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
page 3-15.
page 3-18.
page 2-13.
page 3-8.
page 3-18.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Tilt Wheel
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
Your vehicle has a tilt wheel which allows you to adjust
the steering wheel before you drive. You can raise it
to the highest level to give your legs more room when
you exit and enter the vehicle.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located in
the center of the
The lever that allows you
to tilt the steering wheel is
located on the left side
of the steering column.
instrument panel.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is not in.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.
To tilt the wheel, hold the wheel and push the lever down.
Then, move the wheel to a comfortable position and pull
the lever up firmly to lock the column in place.
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on your steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has one upward (for right) and one
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
Base Level Shown
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever until
the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete
the lane change. The lever will return by itself when
you release it.
• 3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out and other
drivers won’t see your turn signal.
page 3-8.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when you
signal a turn, check the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Windshield Wipers
To change the headlamps from low beam to high or
high beam to low, pull the turn signal lever all the way
towards you. Then release it.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If the wiper blades are frozen to the
windshield, gently loosen or thaw them. If the blades
do become damaged, install new blades or blade
inserts.
When the high beams are
on, this light on the
instrument panel cluster
will also be on.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. A
circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
you until the high-beam headlamps come on, then
release the lever to turn them off.
United States
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LO or OO (Low): Move the lever to this position for
slow, steady wiping cycles.
HI or OOOO (High): Move the lever to this
position for rapid wiping cycles.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
There is a band on the wiper lever to operate the rear
wiper/washer.
9(Off): Turn the band to this position to turn off the
rear wiper.
Canada
The lever on the right side of the steering column
operates the windshield wipers. Push up or pull down
on the lever to place it in one of the following positions.
Z (Rear Wiper): Turn the band to this position to turn
on the rear wiper. In this position the wiping cycles
will be slow and steady.
MIST or 8(Mist): Pull the lever down and release
it for a single wiping cycle. The lever will return to
its original position. For more cycles, hold the lever down
before releasing it.
Y (Wash): Turn and hold the band in this position to
spray washer fluid on the rear window. The rear
wiper will also come on. Release the band when enough
fluid has been sprayed on the window. The rear wiper
will stay on until you turn the band to OFF.
OFF or 9 (Off): Move the lever to this position to
turn off the wipers.
INT or & (Intermittent): Move the lever to this
position to set a delay between wipes. Turn the band on
the lever to set the length of the delay (1, 2, or 3).
For the most frequent wipes, select 3, for the least
frequent, select 1.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Washer
Cruise Control
Your vehicle may be equipped with cruise control.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
Pull the windshield wiper lever toward you to operate
the windshield wipers. Washer fluid will squirt onto
the windshield and the wipers will run for a few cycles
to clear the windshield. For more wash cycles, pull
the lever toward you and hold it there.
The buttons for the cruise control are located on the
steering wheel.
I(Cruise On/Off): Push this button to turn the
system on and off.
RES S (Resume/Accelerate): Push this button to
make the vehicle resume a previously set speed or to
accelerate when cruise is already active.
SET – (Set/Coast): Press this button to set the speed
or to decrease the speed when cruise is already
active.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
Setting Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
1. Press the cruise on/off button. The indicator light
will come on.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press the set/coast button.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 4-10
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resuming a Set Speed
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course,
disengages the cruise control. But you don’t need to
reset it.
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
• Press set/coast button until you reach the lower
speed you want, then release it.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you
can press the cruise control resume/accelerate button.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the set/coast button. Each time you do this, you
will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
You will go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If you hold the resume/accelerate button the vehicle will
keep going faster until you release the button or
apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, do not
hold the resume/accelerate button.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Using Cruise Control on Hills
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the set/coast button, then release the
button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll now
cruise at the higher speed.
• Press the resume/accelerate button. Hold it there
until you get up to the speed you want, and then
release the button. To increase your speed in very
small amounts, press the button briefly. Each
time you do this, your vehicle will go about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) faster.
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to
keep your speed down. Applying the brake or shifting into
a lower gear will take you out of cruise control. If you
need to apply the brake or shift to a lower gear due to the
grade of the downhill slope, you may not want to attempt
to use your cruise control feature.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ending Cruise Control
; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to this position
to turn on the parking lamps together with the
following:
To end a cruise control session, step lightly on the
brake pedal.
• Sidemarker Lamps
• Taillamps
Stepping on the brake will end the current cruise control
session only. Press the cruise on/off button to turn off
the system completely.
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
53 (Headlamps): Turning the control to this
position turns on the headlamps, together with the
previously listed lamps and lights.
Headlamps
9(Off): If equipped, turn the control to this position to
turn off the headlamps.
The exterior lamp control is located on the turn
signal/multifunction lever.
Lamps On Reminder
O(Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the control with this
If you open the driver’s door with the ignition off and the
lamps on, you will hear a warning chime.
symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp control has the following three
positions:
AUTO (Automatic): If equipped, turn the control to this
position to put the headlamps in automatic mode.
AUTO mode will turn the exterior lamps on and off
depending upon how much light is available outside of
the vehicle.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the DRL are on, the high-beam headlamps will be
on at a reduced brightness. The taillamps, sidemarker
and other lamps will not be on. The instrument panel will
not be lit up either.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
When you turn the exterior lamp band to the headlamp
position, your regular headlamps will come on. The
other lamps that come on with your headlamps will also
come on.
When you turn off the headlamps, the regular lamps will
go off, and your high-beam headlamps will come on
to the reduced brightness.
The DRL system will make your low-beam headlamps
come on at a reduced brightness in daylight when
the following conditions are met:
To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, move the shift
lever to PARK (P). The DRL will stay off until you move
the shift lever out of PARK (P). To override the DRL
on manual transaxle vehicles, you must set the parking
brake while the ignition is off and then start your
vehicle. The DRL will stay off until you release the
parking brake.
• The ignition is on,
• the exterior lamp band is in AUTO,
• the transaxle is not in PARK (P),
• the light sensor determines it is daytime, and
• the parking brake is released.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Headlamp System
Fog Lamps
If your vehicle has this feature and when it is dark
enough outside, the headlamps will come on
automatically.
If your vehicle has this feature, use your fog lamps for
better visibility in foggy or misty conditions.
The button for your fog
lamps is located in the
instrument panel above
the radio.
Your vehicle has a light
sensor located on top of
the instrument panel. Make
sure it is not covered, or
the headlamps will be
on when you don’t
need them.
Push the button to turn the fog lamps on or off.
The system may also turn on the headlamps when
driving through a parking garage or tunnel.
When using fog lamps, the parking lamps or low-beam
headlamps must be on.
A light on the button will come on when the fog lamps
are actually on. Fog lamps will go off whenever the
high-beam headlamps come on. When the high-beam
headlamps go off, the fog lamps will come on again.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior Lamps
Dome Lamp
The liftgate lamps are located on the bottom left and
right corner of the liftgate. They will come on when the
liftgate or any door is opened. The liftgate lamps
can be controlled by the dome lamp switch. See Dome
The dome lamp switch has three positions.
9(Off): The lamps will not come on as long as the
switch is in this position.
R(On): The lamps will stay on as long as the switch is
in this position.
Instrument Panel Brightness
AUTO: The lamps will come on when a door is opened.
This feature controls the brightness of the instrument
panel lights.
The thumbwheel for this
feature is located on the
center of the instrument
panel.
Entry Lighting
If the dome lamp is in the AUTO position, the lamps
inside your vehicle will come on when any door is
opened. In addition, the lights will come on when the
remote keyless entry unlock button is pressed. It will stay
on for 20 seconds or until a door is opened. After the door
is opened the lights will remain on and stay on for
20 seconds after the doors are closed, or until you put the
key in the ignition and turn the key to RUN. The lights will
then gradually dim until it is no longer lit.
Map Lamps
Turn the thumbwheel to the right to brighten the lights
or to the left to dim them.
The lamps are located on the headliner above the
rearview mirror. To turn the lamps on, press the lens.
Press the lens again to turn them off.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating.
Cargo Lamp
The cargo lamp is located over the rear compartment. It
will come on if any door is opened or the dome lamp
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your retailer for additional information
on the accessory power outlet.
Battery Run-Down Protection
Your vehicle is equipped with a battery saver feature
designed to protect your vehicle’s battery.
When any interior lamp is left on and the ignition is
turned off, the battery rundown protection system will
automatically turn the lamp off after 20 minutes. This will
avoid draining the battery.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Check with your
retailer before adding electrical equipment.
Accessory Power Outlets
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
installation instructions included with the equipment.
The accessory power outlets can be used to connect
electrical equipment such as a cellular phone or
CB radio.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
The accessory power outlets are located on the
instrument panel near the climate controls and on the
rear of the center console.
To use the outlets, remove the cover. When not in use,
always cover the outlet with the protective cap.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
Climate Controls
floor outlets with some air directed to the windshield.
When you select this mode, the system will turn
recirculation mode off automatically and will run the air
conditioning compressor unless the outside air is at
or below freezing. Recirculation mode cannot be
selected while in floor mode. This is designed to limit
fogging in your vehicle.
Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.
The right knob can also be used to select defog or
defrost mode. See “Defogging and Defrosting” later in
this section.
A (Fan): Turn the center knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
To turn the fan off, turn the center knob all the way
counterclockwise. In any setting other than off, the fan
will run continuously with the ignition on. The fan
must be turned on to run the air conditioning
compressor.
Operation
To change the current mode, use the right knob to
select one of the following:
Temperature Control: Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature inside your vehicle.
H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets and to the floor outlets. Cooler air is directed
to the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
@ (Recirculate): This mode keeps outside air from
coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent outside
air and odors from entering your vehicle or to help heat or
cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly. An indicator
light will come on in this mode. Operation in this mode
during periods of high humidity and cool outside
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control system is used
properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost from
your windshield and side windows. Use the defog mode
to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm the
passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog or frost
from the windshield more quickly. For best results, clear
all snow and ice from the windshield before defrosting.
temperatures may result in increased window fogging. If
window fogging is experienced, select the defrost mode.
Recirculation mode is not available in floor, defog or
defrost modes and will shut off automatically and change
to outside air until a mode other than floor, defog or
defrost is selected. This is designed to limit fogging in
your vehicle.
Turn the right knob to select the defog or defrost mode.
-(Defog): This mode directs air to the windshield,
side window outlets and floor outlets. When you select
this mode, the system will turn recirculation mode
off automatically and will run the air conditioning
compressor unless the outside air is at or below
freezing. Recirculation mode cannot be selected while in
defog mode. To defog the windows faster, turn the
temperature knob clockwise to the warmest setting.
#(Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the air
conditioning system on or off. When this button is
pressed, an indicator light above the button will come
on to let you know the air conditioning is activated.
Air conditioning can be selected in any mode as long as
the fan switch is on.
0(Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield, with some air directed to the side window
outlets and the floor outlets. When you select this mode,
the system will turn recirculation mode off automatically
and will run the air conditioning compressor unless
the outside air is at or below freezing. Recirculation
mode cannot be selected while in defrost mode.
To defrost the windows faster, turn the temperature
knob clockwise to the warmest setting.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps
the system to operate more efficiently.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling
or after turning off the engine. This is normal.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the defogger will only run for approximately five minutes
before turning off. The defogger can also be turned
off by pressing the button again or by turning off
the engine.
Operation Tips
After the front window is clear of ice or fog, operating in
the mixing mode between bi-level and floor will help
clear the side windows. To do this, do the following:
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or
damage the warming grid, and the repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not attach a
temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything
similar to the defogger grid.
• Change the mode to a setting between floor
mode and bi-level mode.
• Aim the outboard panel registers toward the side
windows.
• Close the inboard panel registers.
• Operate at blower two or three.
Outlet Adjustment
• Adjust the temperature knob for best comfort.
Use the louvers located on the air outlets to change the
direction of the airflow.
Rear Window Defogger
Operation Tips
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the vehicle that may block
the flow of air into your vehicle.
The rear window defogger will only work when the
ignition is in RUN.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
< (Rear Window Defogger): Press the button to
turn the rear window defogger on or off. An indicator
light above the button will come on to let you know that
the rear window defogger is activated.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
The rear window defogger will stay on for approximately
15 minutes after the button is pressed, unless the
ignition is turned to ACC or LOCK. If turned on again,
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Remove the push pins
from the air filter
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
access panel.
If your vehicle has this feature, the passenger
compartment air, both outside air and recirculated air, is
routed through a passenger compartment filter. The
filter removes certain particles from the air, including
pollen and dust particles. Reductions in airflow,
which may occur more quickly in dusty areas, indicate
that the filter needs to be replaced early.
The filter should be replaced as part of routine
scheduled maintenance. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for replacement intervals. To find out
what type of filter to use, see Normal Maintenance
2. Remove the air filter access panel.
The passenger compartment air filter can be accessed
from under the hood.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Remove the air filter from the housing by pressing
the tab on the inboard side of the housing.
4. Remove the filter by sliding it out of the housing.
5. Install the new air filter.
When installing a new air filter make sure the AIR
FLOW arrow is pointing rearward.
6. Reinstall the air filter access panel.
7. Reinstall the air filter access panel push pins.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
as you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s
advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly — and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning
lights and gages. They’re a big help.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how the vehicle is running. You will know how fast
you are going, about how much fuel you have used, and many other things you will need to know to drive safely and
economically.
United States version shown, Canada similar
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Tachometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in either miles or kilometers.
Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer. You may
wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a new
odometer installed. If the new one can be set to the
mileage total of the old odometer, then that will be done.
If it can’t, it will be set at zero and a label must be put
on the driver’s door to show the old mileage reading
when the new odometer was installed. If the mileage is
unknown, the label should then indicate “previous
mileage unknown”.
Trip Odometer
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
Your trip odometer is located on the instrument panel
and shows how far your vehicle has been driven
since the trip odometer was last reset. To reset the trip
odometer to zero, press and hold the trip/reset button
on the speedometer for about two seconds. Press
the trip/reset button to switch between the trip odometer
and odometer.
Notice: If you operate the engine above 6,300 rpm,
your vehicle could be damaged, and the damages
would not be covered by your warranty. Do not
operate the engine with the tachometer above
6,300 rpm.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
Airbag Readiness Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will
come on for several seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the airbag symbol. The system
checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the airbag sensor, the airbag
modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the airbag
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for several seconds,
then it will flash for
several more.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then
the light should go out.
This means the system
is ready.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime
nor the light will come on.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your
airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Warning Light
{CAUTION:
The battery warning light
will come on briefly as a
check, when you turn
on the ignition. Then it
should go out when
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the airbag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
the engine is started.
If the light does not come on when you start your
vehicle, have your vehicle serviced right away. This
condition may indicate your battery warning light is not
functioning properly. If this light comes on while you
are driving, be sure to turn off accessories such as the
radio and climate control system. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light does not come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Up-Shift Light
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle may have up-shift light. When this light
comes on, you should shift to the next higher gear
if weather, road, and traffic conditions allow you to.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still
work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
This light is located in
your instrument panel
cluster under your
If the brake system warning light comes on, there is a
brake problem. Have your brake system inspected
right away.
temperature gage.
The BRAKE light is located
in the instrument panel
cluster.
United States Only
information.
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
When the ignition is on, the BRAKE light will come on
when you set your parking brake. The light will stay on if
your parking brake doesn’t release fully. A chime will
also sound if the parking brake is not fully released and
the vehicle is moving. If it stays on after your parking
brake is fully released, it means you have a brake
problem.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The BRAKE light will also come on to indicate a low
more information.
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, the anti-lock brake
system (ABS) warning light will come on briefly, as
a check, when you start your vehicle. If it doesn’t, have
your vehicle serviced so that the light works properly
when it needs to.
The ABS light is located
in the instrument panel
cluster, to the left of
the engine coolant
{CAUTION:
temperature gage.
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning light
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
on after you have pulled off the road and
stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for
service.
If the light stays on longer than a few seconds after you
start your engine, or comes on and stays on while
you are driving, try resetting the system. To reset the
system, do the following:
1. If you are driving, pull over when it is safe to do so.
2. Be sure the vehicle is in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the ignition.
4. Then restart the engine.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the light remains on after resetting the system or
comes on again while driving, your vehicle needs
service. If the ABS light is on, but the regular brake
system warning light is not on, you do not have anti-lock
brakes, but you still have regular brakes. Have your
vehicle serviced right away. If both brake lights are on,
you do not have anti-lock brakes, and there’s a
problem with your regular brakes as well. Have your
page 4-50.
• For vehicles equipped with the 2.2L L4 engine, turn
the system off by pressing the traction control
button located on the instrument panel above the
audio system. The warning light will come on
and stay on. To turn the system back on, press the
button again. The warning light should go off.
more information.
• For vehicles equipped with the 3.5L V6 engine, the
traction control system will be turned off when the
shift lever is in REVERSE (R) or LOW (L). The
traction control system warning light will be displayed
on the instrument panel. The traction control system
can be activated again by selecting DRIVE (D) or
INTERMEDIATE (I).
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
Your vehicle may have a
traction control system
warning light. The traction
control system warning
light may come on for the
following reasons:
• If there’s an engine-related and brake system
problem that is specifically related to traction control,
the traction control system will turn off and the
warning light will come on.
If the traction control system warning light comes on
and stays on for an extended period of time when the
system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Low Traction Light
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
If your vehicle has the
Traction Control System
(TCS), this light will
come on when the system
is limiting wheel spin.
The engine coolant
temperature warning light
will come on when the
engine has overheated.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this is
normal. The roads may be slippery if this light comes on.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
If this happens you should pull over and see Engine
The light will stay on for a few seconds after the system
stops limiting wheel spin. This light should also come
on for a few seconds when you start your vehicle.
If it does not, have your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperature
warning light on could cause your vehicle to
Your vehicle could be damaged, and it might not be
covered by your warranty. Never drive with the
engine coolant temperature warning light on.
This light will come on and flash when the temperature
of the automatic transmission fluid is too high. If this
happens you should pull over, shift into PARK (P) and
let the engine idle until the light goes out.
This light will also come on briefly when starting your
vehicle. If it does not, have your vehicle serviced.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
This gage displays the
temperature of the
vehicle’s engine.
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The check engine light comes on to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
If the indicator needle moves into the shaded area, the
engine is too hot. A temperature indicator light will
turn on.
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, and the temperature indicator
light comes on, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after awhile, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good, and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by your warranty.
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
• Reducing vehicle speed
• Avoiding hard accelerations
• Avoiding steep uphill grades
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of your
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with
other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your retailer
for service as soon as possible.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light does not come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your retailer can check the vehicle. Your retailer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Here are some things you need to know in order to help
your vehicle pass an inspection:
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your retailer can prepare the vehicle
for inspection.
The engine could be low on oil, or could have some
other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately.
The oil light may also come on when the ignition is on
but the engine is not running, the light will come on as a
test to show you it is working, but the light will go out
when you turn the ignition to START. If it doesn’t come
on with the ignition on, you may have a problem with
the fuse or bulb. Have it fixed right away.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Oil Pressure Light
If you have a low engine
oil pressure problem, this
light will stay on after
you start your engine, or
come on when you
are driving. This indicates
that your engine is not
receiving enough oil.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Change Engine Oil Light
Reduced Engine Power Light
If this light comes on, it
This light will come on
briefly when you start the
engine.
means that service is
required for your vehicle.
See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4
page 5-15 for more
information.
After having the oil changed you will need to reset the
information.
This light, along with the service engine soon light will
be displayed when a noticeable reduction in the
vehicle’s performance may occur. Stop the vehicle and
turn off the ignition. Wait for 10 seconds and restart
your vehicle. This may correct the condition.
Security Light
The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed when
the reduced engine power light is on but acceleration
and speed may be reduced. The performance may
be reduced until the next time you drive your vehicle. If
this light stays on, see your retailer as soon as
possible for diagnosis and repair.
Your vehicle is equipped
with a Passlock®
theft-deterrent system.
With this system, the
security light will flash as
you open the door if
your ignition is off.
This light will come on briefly when the vehicle is
turned on.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Highbeam On Light
Gate Ajar Light
This light will come on
when the high-beam
headlamps are in use.
If this light comes on, your
liftgate is not completely
closed. Driving with
the liftgate open can cause
carbon monoxide (CO)
to enter the vehicle.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Indicator Light
Service Vehicle Soon Light
This light will come on if
you have problems that
may require the vehicle to
be taken in for service.
This light is located on the
instrument panel cluster. It
goes on whenever the
Daytime Running Lamps
are on.
If the light comes on, take your vehicle to a Saturn
retailer for service as soon as possible.
further information.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are four things that some owners ask about. None
of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
Fuel Gage
• At the service station, the fuel pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
When the ignition is on,
the fuel gage tells you
about how much fuel you
have left in your tank.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to
fill the tank.
• The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
• The gage takes a few seconds to stabilize after the
ignition is turned on, and will go back to empty
when you turn the ignition off.
When the indicator nears empty, the low fuel light will
come on. You still have a little fuel left, but you
page 3-39 for more information.
For your fuel tank capacity, see Capacities and
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Low Fuel Warning Light
Audio System(s)
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone, or two-way radio, make sure that it can
be added by checking with your retailer. Also,
check federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone units. If sound equipment can be added,
it is very important to do it properly. Added
sound equipment may interfere with the operation
of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,
and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may
interfere with the operation of sound equipment
that has been added improperly.
The light next to the fuel
gage will come on briefly
when you are starting
the engine.
This light also comes on when the fuel tank is low on
fuel. When you add fuel the light should go off. If it
doesn’t, have your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Getting suntan lotion, hand lotion, or hand
cleaner on the radio, will soften the paint, and
the paint will eventually begin to peel. Repairs will
not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty. Try not to
get suntan lotion, hand lotion, or hand cleaner on
the radio. If you do, wipe the lotion or cleaner
off immediately.
Figure out which audio system is in your vehicle, find
out what your audio system can do, and how to operate
all of its controls.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Time for Radios without
Radio Data Systems (RDS)
AM-FM Radio
Press and hold the RCL button, at the same time press
the TUNE/SEEK down or up arrows. Press the arrows
until the correct time appears on the display. The
time can be set with the ignition on or off.
Setting the Time for Radios with
Radio Data Systems (RDS)
Press and hold the RCL button and at the same time
press the HR (AUTO EQ left) or MN (AUTO EQ
right) arrows. You will hear a beep indicating that you
can change the time. Release the RCL button and press
HR until the correct hour appears on the display.
Press MN until the correct minute appears on the
display. The time can be set with the ignition on or off.
Playing the Radio
PUSH ON (Power): Push this knob to turn the system
on and off.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and
hold the RCL and RDS buttons at the same time for
two seconds until SET RDS TIME appears on the
display. If the time is not available from the station, NO
RDS TIME SET will appear on the display.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
RCL (Recall): Press this button to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time. When
the ignition is off, press this button to display the time.
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuning to an
RDS broadcast station, it may take a few minutes for
the time to update.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Tune in the desired station.
Finding a Station
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return.
AM FM: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, or AM. The display will show the selection.
R TUNE Q: Press either arrow to select radio
stations.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
If the battery has been disconnected or a radio fuse has
been removed, the preset stations and time of day
will need to be reset.
R SEEK Q: Press and hold the up or the down
arrow to go to the next or to the previous station and
stay there.
Using Automatic Set
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
Use this feature to automatically save the radio preset
pushbuttons with the stations with the strongest
radio signals.
SCN (Scan): Press this button to scan stations. The
radio will go to a station, play for a few seconds, then go
on to the next station. Press this button again to stop
scanning.
A.SET (Automatic Set): Press the AM FM button to
have the radio automatically select the first 12 strongest
radio stations for FM and the six strongest radio
stations for AM.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
To select the stations, perform the following:
1. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
2. Press and hold AM FM until you hear a beep.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM) can be
programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons, by
performing the following steps:
The radio will begin to search the current band.
The radio will store the stations, starting from the
lowest frequency, to each preset pushbutton. A.SET
will appear on the display when the radio is
finished storing the stations.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cancelling Automatic Set
Radio with CD (Base Level)
The radio retains the previously stored stations so they
can be recalled when automatic set is canceled.
Press and hold the AM FM until you hear a beep. A.SET
will no longer appear on the display.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to increase or to decrease the bass.
TREB (Treble): Press the TREB knob lightly so it
extends, then pull then knob out slightly. Turn the knob
to increase or to decrease the treble. If a station is
weak or noisy, decrease the treble.
Push the knob back into its stored position when not
in use.
Playing the Radio
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
PUSH ON (Power): Press this knob to turn the system
BAL (Balance): To adjust the balance between the
right and the left speakers, pull the VOL knob out
slightly. Turn the knob to move the sound toward the
right or the left speakers.
on and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
RCL (Recall): Press this button to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time. When
the ignition is off, press this button to display the time.
Push the knob back into its stored position when not
in use.
FADE: To adjust the fade between the front and the
rear speakers, turn the ring around the VOL knob.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Tune in the desired station.
Finding a Station
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return.
AM FM: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, or AM. The display will show the selection.
R TUNE Q: Press the up or down arrow to select
radio stations.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
If the battery has been disconnected or a radio fuse has
been removed, the preset stations and time of day
will need to be reset.
R SEEK Q: Press and hold the up or the down
arrow to go to the next or to the previous station and
stay there.
Using Automatic Set
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
A.SET (Automatic Set): Press the AM FM button to
have the radio automatically select the first 12 strongest
radio stations for FM and the six strongest radio
stations for AM.
SCN (Scan): Press this button to scan stations. The
radio will go to a station, play for a few seconds, then go
on to the next station. Press this button again to stop
scanning.
To select the stations, perform the following:
1. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
2. Press and hold AM FM until you hear a beep.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
The radio will begin to search the current band.
The radio will store the stations, starting from the
lowest frequency, to each preset pushbutton. A.SET
will appear on the display when the radio is
finished storing the stations.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can
be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,
by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cancelling Automatic Set
Playing a CD
The radio retains the previously stored stations so they
can be recalled when automatic set is canceled.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing.
You can insert a CD with the ignition off.
Press and hold AM FM until you hear a beep. A.SET
will no longer appear on the display.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
MODE: Press this button until BAS or TRE appears on
the display. Press the plus or minus buttons to
increase or to decrease. The display will show the bass
or the treble level. If a station is weak or noisy,
decrease the treble.
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, the
track number will appear on the display.
Play full size CDs only. The CD player cannot play the
smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single CDs.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
MODE: To adjust the balance between the right and
the left speakers, press this button until BAL appears on
the display. Press the plus or minus buttons to move
the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press this button until FAD appears on the
display. Press the plus or minus buttons to move
the sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
5 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM will
appear on the display. Press RDM again to turn off
random play.
6 RPT (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to hear a track
over again. RPT will appear on the display. The
current track will continue to repeat. Press RPT again to
turn off repeat play.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
Q TUNE SEEK R: Press the up arrow to go to the
start of the current or of the previous track. Press
the down arrow to go to the start of the next track. If
either arrow is held or pressed more than once,
the player will continue moving backward or forward
through the CD.
1 PRV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
start of the current track if more than eight seconds have
played. If this pushbutton is held or pressed more
than once, the player will continue moving backward
through the CD.
RCL (Recall): Press this button to see the track
number. Press this button again to see how long the
current track has been playing.
2 NXT (Next): Press this pushbutton to go to the next
track. If this pushbutton is held or pressed more
than once, the player will continue moving forward
through the CD.
AM FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Release this pushbutton
to play the track. The elapsed time of the track will
appear on the display.
CD: Press this button to play a CD when listening to
the radio. The CD symbol will appear on the display
when a CD is loaded.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. Release this pushbutton
to play the track. The elapsed time of the track will
appear on the display.
EJ (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD Messages
Radio with CD (MP3)
ERR (Error): If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
Single CD Player Audio System shown — Six-Disc
CD Player and DVD Radio similar
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your retailer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
retailer when reporting the problem.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Data System (RDS)
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States. XM™ offers
100 coast-to-coast channels including music, news,
sports, talk, and children’s programming. XM™ provides
digital quality audio and text information that includes
song title and artist name. A service fee is required in
order to receive the XM™ service. For more information,
contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Playing the Radio
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
O (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In some cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
and off.
u (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
RCL (Recall): Press this button to view station call
letters or RDS category, if available.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead of
the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type category for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
Press and hold the RCL button until you hear a beep,
this is to inform you that the system has been reset
to default.
4 (Information): Press this button to view RDS text
information, if available.
Press the RDS button to change the display mode from
radio to CD or from CD to radio.
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finding a Station
t SEEK u: Press and hold the right or left arrow to
go to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
AM FM: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, or AM. The display will show the selection.
To scan stations, press either arrow until you hear a
beep. The radio will go to a station, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next station. Press either
arrow again to stop scanning.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to select XM™
Satellite Radio Service (if equipped) and to switch
between XM1 and XM2 (if equipped). While in XM, you
can perform the following:
To scan preset stations, press either arrow for four
seconds until you hear a beep. The radio will go to a
preset station stored on the pushbuttons, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next station. Press either
arrow again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning
presets.
• Rotate the tune knob or use either SEEK arrow to
change channels.
• Press the information button to view track title, artist
title, and channel title.
The radio will only seek and scan stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
• Press either CAT arrow to select different
categories.
O (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Automatic Set
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
A.SET (Automatic Set): Press and hold the AM FM
button to have the radio automatically select the first
12 strongest radio stations for FM and the six strongest
radio stations for AM.
1. Turn the radio on.
To select the stations, perform the following:
1. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
2. Press and hold AM FM until you hear a beep.
2. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM. Press
the AUX button to select XM1 or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
The radio will begin to search the current band.
The radio will store the stations, starting from the
lowest frequency, to each preset pushbutton. A.SET
will appear on the display when the radio is
finished storing the stations.
4. Press the right or left AUTO EQ button to select the
equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons. Preset X Stored will appear on the
display and you will hear a beep. Whenever
that numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return and the equalization that was
selected will be stored for that pushbutton. If the
equalization of a preset is changed while listening to
that station, the radio will save the new equalization.
Cancelling Automatic Set
The radio retains the previously stored stations so they
can be recalled when automatic set is canceled.
Press and hold AM FM until you hear a beep. A.SET
will no longer appear on the display.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
If the battery has been disconnected or a radio fuse has
been removed, the preset stations and time of day
may need to be reset.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
To select and find a desired CAT perform the following:
Q P (Bass/Treble): Press this knob until BASS or
TREB appears on the display. Turn this knob to increase
or to decrease. The display will show the bass or the
treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, decrease
the treble.
1. Press the RDS button to activate program type
select mode.
2. Press the right or left CAT arrow to select a
category. CATEGORY will appear on the display.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press the
SEEK button to select and to take you to the
category’s first station.
q AUTO EQ r (Automatic Equalization): Press the
right and left arrow to select customized equalization
settings designed for country/western, jazz, news, pop,
rock, and classical. There is also a flat setting that
has been factory tuned for the best overall performance.
4. To go to another station within that category while
CAT is displayed, press the SEEK button once. If
CAT is not displayed, press the RDS button or
either CAT arrow to enable category search, then
press the SEEK button.
To return the bass and treble to the manual mode,
press either arrow until CUSTOM appears on the
display.
5. Select a category using either CAT arrow. While the
category is displayed, press and hold either SEEK
arrow until you hear a beep to scan through all
stations in that RDS category.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Q P (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance between
the right and the left speakers, press this knob until BAL
appears on the display. Turn this knob to move the
sound toward the right or the left speakers.
RDS categories only have six available options from
which to choose. The category you select will search for
an expanded list of categories.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press this knob until FAD appears on the
display. Turn this knob to move the sound toward the
front or the rear speakers.
If the RCL button is pressed, the broadcast category will
appear on the display, not the selected category.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NOT
FOUND will appear on the display and the radio will
return to the last station you were listening to.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRAF (Traffic): If TA appears on the display, the tuned
station has the ability to broadcast traffic
RDS Messages
announcements and if a traffic announcement comes on
the tuned radio station you will hear it.
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is low or
a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop during
the announcement. Alert announcements cannot be
turned off.
If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements,
press the TRAF button and the radio will seek to a
station that does. When a station that broadcasts traffic
announcements is found, the radio will stop seeking
and TA will appear on the display. If no station is found
that broadcasts traffic announcements, NO TRAFFIC
will appear on the display.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not currently supported
by RDS stations in the United States. It is up to the
individual stations to decide to support this feature.
If TA is on the display, press the TRAF button to turn off
the traffic announcements.
4 (Information): If the current station has a message,
the information symbol will appear on the display.
Press this button to see the message. The message
may display the artist, song title, call in phone
numbers, etc.
The radio will play the traffic announcement with the
volume at a moderate level. The radio will interrupt the
play of a CD or XM™ Satellite Radio Station if the
last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
Very few radio stations in the United States currently use
the traffic announcement feature.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release this button. A
new group of words will appear on the display after
every press of this button. Once the complete message
has been displayed, the information symbol will
disappear from the display until another new message
is received. The last message can be displayed by
pressing this button until a new message is received or
a different station is tuned to.
Pressing the RDS button will change the display mode
from radio to CD or from CD to radio.
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
Playing the Single CD Player
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing.
You can insert a CD with the ignition off.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, the
track number will appear on the display.
g 1 (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
start of the current track. If this pushbutton is held
or pressed more than once, the player will continue
moving backward through the CD.
Play full size CDs only. The CD player cannot play the
smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single CDs.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
2 l (Next): Press this pushbutton to go to the next
track. If this pushbutton is held or pressed more
than once, the player will continue moving forward
through the CD.
5/ RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM will
appear on the display. Press RDM again to turn off
random play.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6/N (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to hear a track
over again. RPT will appear on the display. The
current track will continue to repeat. Press this
pushbutton again to turn off repeat play.
4 (Information): Press this button to view CD text
information, if available. To change the default on the
display to track name, album name, or artist name,
instead of elapsed track time, press this button to view
the available information. Then press and hold the
RCL button for five seconds. The selected display will
now be the default.
r CAT (Reverse): Press and hold the left arrow to
reverse quickly within a track. Release this pushbutton
to play the passage. The elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
RCL (Recall): Press and hold the RCL button until you
hear a beep, this is to inform you that the system
has been reset to default.
CAT [ (Forward): Press and hold the right arrow to
advance quickly within a track. Release this pushbutton
to play the passage. The elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
AM FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current or to the previous track. Press the right
arrow to go to the start of the next track. If either arrow
is held or pressed more than once, the player will
continue moving backward or forward through the CD.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD or to
switch to XM1 or XM2 when listening to the radio.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off.
To scan tracks, press either SEEK arrow for four
seconds. The radio will go to the next track, play for a
few seconds, then go on to the next track. Press
either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning tracks.
If you eject a CD, but decide that you want to listen to
it, press the CD button. The CD player will pull the
CD back in and the CD will begin to play. If a CD is
ejected, but not removed from the radio, the radio
will automatically reload the CD, after 25 seconds, to
prevent damage.
O (Tune): Turn this knob to quickly change tracks.
If you are playing an MP3 CD, turn this knob to
search file folders.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
Playing the Six-Disc CD Player
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
M (Load): Press this button to load CDs into the CD
player. This CD player will hold up to six CDs.
To load one CD, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, the
track number will appear on the display.
2. Press the load button for less than three seconds.
3. Press the pushbutton (1-6) for the CD slot to
load. WAIT DISC X will appear on the display.
Play full size CDs only. The CD player cannot play the
smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single CDs.
If the CD slot is empty, LOAD DISC X will appear
on the display, and a CD can be loaded. If a CD slot
is already loaded, DISC X LOADED will appear
on the display.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the CD in.
If an equalization setting is selected for the CD, the
equalization will be activated each time a CD is played.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
If the radio is on or off, the CD will begin to play
automatically.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To load all CDs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2 l (Next): Press this pushbutton to go to the next
track. If this pushbutton is held or pressed more
than once, the player will continue moving forward
through the CD.
2. Press and hold the load button for more than
three seconds.
5/RDM (Random): Press and release this pushbutton
to hear the tracks on the current CD in random,
rather than sequential, order. RDM will appear on the
display. Press RDM again to turn off random play.
3. Load, up to six CDs, in order, starting with the first
empty slot.
Loading will continue until all six CDs are loaded or
load is stopped by pressing any other radio
button. The radio will stop trying to load CDs if you
wait too long to insert a CD.
Press and hold RDM for two seconds to hear the tracks
on all of the CDs loaded in random, rather than
sequential, order. ALL RDM will appear on the display.
Press RDM again to turn off random play.
4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the CD in.
Cancel the loading of a CD by pressing the load
button once.
6/N (Repeat): Press this pushbutton to hear a track
over again. RPT will appear on the display. The
current track will continue to repeat. Press RPT again to
turn off repeat play.
If an equalization setting is selected for the CD, the
equalization will be activated each time a CD is played.
Press and hold the RPT button to hear all tracks on the
CD over again. RPT will appear on the display. The
current track will continue to repeat. Press RPT again to
turn off repeat play.
If the radio is on or off, the CD will begin to play
automatically.
g 1 (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
start of the current track. If this pushbutton is held
or pressed more than once, the player will continue
moving backward through the CD.
r CAT (Reverse): Press and hold the left arrow to
reverse quickly within a track. Release this pushbutton
to play the passage. The elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RCL (Recall): Press and hold the RCL button until you
hear a beep, this is to inform you that the system
has been reset to default.
CAT [ (Forward): Press and hold the right arrow to
advance quickly within a track. Release this pushbutton
to play the passage. The elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
AM FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD(s) will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
t SEEK u: Press the right or left arrow to go to the
previous or next CD.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD or to
switch to XM1 or XM2 when listening to the radio.
To scan tracks on the current CD, press and hold either
SEEK arrow for more than two seconds, but less
then four seconds. The radio will go to the next track,
play for a few seconds, then go on to the next track.
Press either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning tracks.
B (CD): Press this button to go to the next CD, if
more than one CD is loaded.
Z (Eject): To eject one CD, press this button for less
than two seconds. Then press the pushbutton number
that corresponds to the loaded CD that you want to
eject.
To scan tracks on all of the CDs loaded, press and
hold either SEEK arrow for more than four seconds. The
radio will go to the next track, play for a few seconds,
then go on to the next track. Press either SEEK
arrow again to stop scanning tracks.
To eject all loaded CDs, press and hold this button for
more than two seconds.
O (Tune): Turn this knob to quickly change tracks.
Eject may be activated with either the ignition or radio
off. If you eject a CD, but decide that you want to listen
to it, press the CD button. This will pull the CD back
in and it will begin to play. If a CD is ejected, but
not removed from the radio, the radio will automatically
reload the CD, after 25 seconds, to prevent damage.
4 (Information): Press this button to view CD text
information, if available. To change the default on the
display, track name, artist name, album name, file name,
or directory, press this button to scroll through each
display. Once the desired display is shown, press and
hold the RCL button for five seconds. The selected
display will now be the default.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The radio supports multi-session discs, but only the
files from the last session will be played.
Using an MP3 CD
MP3 Format
• There are a total of 20 directories (folders) allowed
on a CD. The file structure can be 4 directories
deep (a folder within a folder, within a folder, etc.).
Anything more than 20 directories will be ignored.
Each directory may have up to 99 files contained
within it. Files not having the *.mp3 extension
will not be played, but still count toward the
maximum. Anything more than the first 99 files
within a directory will be ignored. A single CD may
have up to 254 files and directories. Anything
beyond the 254 limit will be ignored.
The MP3 radio will play both standard audio CDs and
CD-R or CD-RWs. The CD-R/RWs may contain either
standard audio (*.cda) or compressed audio (*.mp3).
Customers who record their own music CD-R/RWs
should be aware of the following:
• The files can be recorded on a CD-R/RW disc with
a maximum capacity of 700 MB.
• The radio will play only compressed audio files
recorded in the *.mp3 format. It also supports
playlists that can be made and saved with popular
MP3 software, in the *.m3u format. The directory,
playlist, and song name must have no more than
64 characters combined, e.g. /DIRECTORY
NAME/PLAYLIST NAME/SONG NAME.MP3. If
more than 64 characters are present, the radio will
ignore that song and move to the next one.
• MP3 files must be written to a CD-R/RW in one of
the following industry-standard formats:
− ISO 9660 Level 1
− ISO 9660 Level 2
− Joliet
− Romeo
• The radio will only play audio from a CD-R/RW, it
cannot record audio.
• ID3 tag information is displayed by the radio, if
available. The ID3 tag information can be either
version 1 or 2. The radio will display a filename,
song name, artist name, album name, directory
name, or playlist name.
− The radio does not support DVD audio.
− The radio does not support UNICODE.
• The radio will play a mixed mode CD-R/RW,
one recorded with both *.cda and *.mp3 files.
If the customer does not follow these guidelines when
recording a CD-R(W), the CD may not play in the radio.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
Playing an MP3
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
See “Playing the Single CD Player” and “Playing the
Six-Disc CD Player” earlier to use any radio control,
while playing an MP3, that is not listed here.
Play full size CDs only. The CD player cannot play the
smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single CDs.
g 1 (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
start of the current track. If this pushbutton is held
or pressed more than once, the player will continue
moving backward through the current directory.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
2 l (Next): Press this pushbutton to go to the next
track. If this pushbutton is held or pressed more
than once, the player will continue moving forward
through the current directory.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
4: Press this pushbutton to enter playlist mode. Use the
tune knob to cycle through the available playlists.
Playlist X will appear on the display. Use the 1 and
2 pushbuttons to cycle through songs in a particular
playlist. Press the 4 pushbutton again to exit
playlist mode.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If a CD is a mixed mode, contains standard CD audio
and MP3 compressed audio, the radio will assign
the standard CD audio to a directory, which is listed as
ROM audio directory.
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O (Tune): Turn this knob to quickly change tracks
on the CDDA and the MP3 folder files.
CD Messages
If any error message appears on the display and/or the
CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
4 (Information): Press this button to see the elapsed
time of the track and the current track time. To
change the default on the display, track name, artist
name, album name, file name, or directory, press
this button to scroll through each display. Once the
desired display is shown, press and hold the RCL button
for five seconds. The selected display will now be the
default.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
r CAT [: Press either arrow to change directories.
• The format of the CD may not be compatible. See
“MP3 Format” earlier for more information.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your retailer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
retailer when reporting the problem.
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Personalization
Rear Seat Entertainment System
This radio has a personalization feature. You can
change the following features:
Your vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) system. The RSE system works with the
vehicles audio system and includes a DVD radio, a
video display screen, two sets of wireless headphones,
and a remote control.
Clock Function: Change the time of the day displayed
on the radio between 12 hour and 24 hour.
Language: This radio supports three languages: ENG
(English), FRE (French), and SPA (Spanish). The
only terms translated are the terms which are fixed in
the display. Terms that are not translated include: MP3
ID3 tags, CD-TEXT information, RDS Text, and
Satellite PDT information.
Parental Control
While a DVD is playing, press the RSE button once for
the Parental Pause Mode. This will pause the DVD
movie. Press the RSE button again to resume playing
the DVD movie where the movie left off when RSE
button was pressed. While a DVD is playing, press and
hold the RSE button for 2 seconds for the Parental
Stop Mode. This will stop the DVD movie. Press
the RSE button again to resume playing the DVD movie
from the beginning.
Beep Level: Change the volume level of the radio’s
beeps between Normal and Loud.
CD Text: Change whether or not the radio displays CD
text by choosing Text On or Text Off.
When the ignition switch is turned on with a DVD
inserted in the radio, the RSE system will default to the
Parental Pause Mode. Press the RSE button for
normal operation.
To change these features, do the following:
1. Press and hold the information button for
five seconds.
2. Press either SEEK arrow to scroll through the
features.
3. Once the feature is displayed, press either CAT
arrow to change the setting.
4. Press the information button again to exit the menu.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The transmitters are located in the display above the
video screen. The headphones will shut off automatically
to save the battery power if the DVD system is shut
off or if the headphones are out of range of the
transmitters for more than three minutes. If you move
too far forward or step out of the vehicle, the
Before You Drive
The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers only.
The driver cannot safely view the video screen
while driving and should not try to do so.
In severe or extreme weather conditions the RSE
system may or may not work until the temperature is
within the operating range. The operating range for the
RSE system is above −4°F (−20°C) or below
140°F (60°C). If the temperature of your vehicle is
outside of this range, heat or cool the vehicle until the
temperature is within the operating range of the
RSE system.
headphones will lose the audio signal.
To adjust the volume on the headphones, use the
volume control located on the right side.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
Headphones
Battery Replacement
The RSE system includes two sets of wireless
headphones. The headphones are used to listen to the
DVD radio or an auxiliary device connected to the
RCA jacks. The wireless headphones have an ON/OFF
switch and a volume control.
To change the batteries, do the following:
1. Slide open the battery door located on the left side
of the headphones.
2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
To use the headphones, turn the switch to ON. An
indicator light located on the headphones will illuminate.
If the light does not illuminate, the batteries may
need to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in
this section for more information. Switch the headphones
to OFF when not in use.
3. Slide the battery door shut.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The RCA jacks are color coded to match typical home
entertainment system equipment. The yellow jack
(right) is for the video input. The white jack (middle) is
for the left audio input. The red jack (left) is for the right
audio input. The red connector must always be used
in order for the DVD system to recognize that an
external source is plugged in.
Stereo RCA Jacks
Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by the
radio system.
To use the auxiliary function, connect a camcorder or a
video game unit to the RCA jacks and turn on the
auxiliary device. If you want to view a DVD, insert the
DVD into the DVD radio. The system will automatically
switch to DVD and start to play. To switch between
the auxiliary device and the DVD, press the AUX button
on the DVD player or the SRCE button on the remote
control. See “DVD Radio” and “Remote Control” later in
this section for more information.
The RCA jacks are located behind the video screen on
the overhead console. The RCA jacks allow audio or
video signals to be connected from an auxiliary device
such as a camcorder or a video game unit to the
RSE. Adapter connectors or cables may be required to
connect the auxiliary device to the RCA jacks. Refer
to the manufacturer’s instructions for proper usage.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD Family: When in RSE mode, press the AUX
button to switch to DVD Family. All passengers will be
able to hear audio through the vehicle’s speakers.
Audio Output
Only one audio source can be heard through the
speakers at one time.
DVD Aux: When RCA jacks are connected, the rear
speakers will be muted. The rear seat passengers
will be able to hear audio from the auxiliary device
through the wireless headphones. The front seat
passengers will be able to listen to the radio by pressing
the AM FM button, or listen to XM™ Satellite Radio
Service (if equipped) or CD, by pressing the AUX button,
through the front speakers.
The only way to listen to the audio through the vehicle
speakers is if the front seat passengers select DVD
Family Mode using the AUX button on the radio.
There are three modes to the RSE system:
RSE: This is the default, when a DVD is inserted, the
rear speakers will be muted. The rear seat passengers
will be able to hear audio through the wireless
If RSE mode is on when the radio is powered off, the
parental control will be activated the next time the radio
is turned on. To resume playback, press the RSE
button.
headphones. The front seat passengers will be able to
listen to the radio by pressing the AM FM button, or
listen to XM™ Satellite Radio Service (if equipped) by
pressing the AUX button, through the front speakers.
When a CD is inserted, the radio may be put into RSE
mode by pressing the RSE button. The rear seat
passengers will be able to listen to the CD through the
wireless headphones. The front seat passengers
will be able to listen to the radio by pressing the AM FM
button, or listen to XM™ Satellite Radio Service (if
equipped) by pressing the AUX button, through the front
speakers.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video Screen
DVD Radio
The video screen is located in the overhead console.
To use the video screen, do the following:
1. Push forward on the release button on the DVD
display console.
2. Pull the screen down, away from you, and adjust its
position as desired.
When the video screen is not in use, push it up into its
locked position.
If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked
position, the screen will shut off, but the DVD will
continue to play through the previously selected audio
source.
The video screen contains the transmitters for the
wireless headphones and the remote control. If the
screen is in the closed position, the signals will not be
available for the operation of the headphones or
the remote control.
The DVD radio is located in the center of the
instrument panel.
The DVD radio is controlled by the buttons on the
remote control. See “Remote Control” later in this
section for more information.
Notice: Directly touching the video screen may
damage it. Do not touch the screen. See “Cleaning
the Video Screen” later in this section for more
information.
The DVD radio is only compatible with DVDs authorized
for use in the United States and Canada (Region
Code 1). The DVD region code is printed on the jacket
of most DVDs. Most audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, and
MP3s can also be played by the DVD radio.
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If an error message appears on the video screen or the
radio, see “DVD Display Error Messages” and “DVD
Radio Error Messages” later in this section.
Playing a Disc
To play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the label side
up, into the loading slot. The DVD player will continue
loading the disc and the player will automatically start.
DVD Radio Buttons
If a DVD is already in the radio, press the play/pause
button on the remote control to start playing the
disc, when the DVD system is active.
To use the radio, see Radio with CD (MP3) under Radio
Vehicle speaker volume, bass, treble, etc. may be
adjusted by pushing the tune knob. See the radio that is
currently in your vehicle for more information on using
the tune knob.
RSE: Press this button to pause the DVD. Press this
button again to play the DVD.
Press and hold this button for more than two seconds to
turn off the RSE system.
Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding or skipping of
the copyright information or the previews. Some
DVDs will begin playing after the previews have finished,
although there may be a delay of up to 30 seconds. If
the DVD does not begin playing the movie automatically,
press the RSE button on the radio. If the DVD still
does not play, refer to the on-screen instructions.
AUX (Auxiliary): When a DVD is playing, press this
button to switch between RSE and DVD family.
To listen to a DVD through the headphones, press
this button.
When a CD is playing, press this button to switch
between playing a CD or listening to XM™ Satellite
Radio Service (if equipped).
The DVD player may not accept some paper
labeled media.
The DVD player can only be powered on by pressing
the RSE button on the radio or by inserting a DVD.
Z (Eject/Load): Press this button to eject a DVD or
CD. If a DVD or CD is ejected, but not removed, the
player will automatically pull it back in after 30 seconds.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing an MP3 CD
Remote Control
The CD player has the ability to recognize up to
20 directories, and up to 99 files per directory to a
maximum of 254 total MP3 selections on a CD. Mixed
media CD’s are not supported.
To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window below the video screen and press the desired
button. Direct sunlight or very bright light may affect the
ability of the RSE transmitter to receive signals from
the remote control. If the remote control does not seem
to be working, the batteries may need to be replaced.
See “Battery Replacement” later in this section. Objects
blocking the line of sight may also affect the function
of the remote control.
Stopping and Resuming Playback
To stop playing a disc, press the stop button on the
remote control.
To resume playback, press the play/pause button on
the remote control. The movie should resume play from
where it last stopped if the disc has not been ejected
and the stop button has not been pressed twice on the
remote control. If the disc has been ejected or the
stop button has been pressed twice on the remote
control, the disc will resume playing at the beginning of
the disc.
The DVD player can only be turned on by pressing the
RSE button on the radio.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area or
in direct sunlight may damage it, and the repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Keep
the remote control stored in a cool, dry place.
Ejecting a Disc
Press the eject button on the radio to eject the disc. If a
disc is ejected from the radio, but not removed, the
radio will reload the disc after a short period of time. The
disc will be stored in the radio. The radio will not
resume play of the disc automatically.
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Buttons
z (Set-up Menu): Press this button to adjust the
color, tint, brightness, contrast, and display mode
(normal, full, or zoom). The dynamic range compression
feature can be used to reduce loud audio and increase
low audio produced by some DVDs.
e (Audio): Press this button to display a menu that
will only appear when a DVD is playing. The format and
content of this function will vary for each disc.
r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast reverse
the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing, press this button
again. This button may not work when the DVD is
playing the copyright information or the previews.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
O (Power): Press this button to turn the DVD player
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing, rewinding,
or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press this button
twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
on and off.
v (Title): Press this button to return the DVD to the
main menu of the DVD.
t (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this button to
return to the start of the current track or chapter. Press
this button again to go to the previous track or
chapter. This button may not work when the DVD is
playing the copyright information or the previews.
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the
arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad
provides the capability of direct chapter, title, and
track number selection.
| (Camera Angle): Press this button to change
camera angles on DVDs that have this feature when a
DVD is playing. The format and content of this
function will vary for each disc.
}10 (Double Digit Entries): Press the button, to
select chapter, title, and track numbers greater than 9.
Press this button before inputting the number.
{ (Subtitle): Press this button to turn on subtitles and
to move through subtitle options when a DVD is
playing. The format and content of this function will vary
for each disc.
\ (Clear): Press this button, within three seconds after
inputting a numeric selection to clear all numeric inputs.
[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast forward
the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding, press this
button again. This button may not work when the DVD
is playing the copyright information or the previews.
P (Illumination): Press this button to turn the remote
control backlight on. The backlight will time out after
about 7 to 10 seconds if no other button is pressed while
the backlight is on.
s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play of a
DVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CD is
playing to pause it. Press this button again to continue
playing the DVD or CD.
y (Main DVD Menu): Press this button to access the
DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every
DVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow buttons to
move the cursor around the DVD menu. After making
a selection press the enter button. This button only
operates when using a DVD.
When the DVD is playing, press the pause button then
press the fast forward button. The DVD will continue
playing in a slow play mode. To cancel slow play mode,
press the play/pause button.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the choices
that are highlighted in any menu.
u (Next Track/Chapter): Press this button to advance
to the beginning of the next track or chapter. This
button may not work when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the previews.
q (Return): Press this button to exit the current
active menu and return to the previous menu. This
button will operate only when a DVD is playing and a
menu is active.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Replacement
DVD Radio Error Messages
To change the remote control batteries, do the following:
No Disc: This message will be displayed, if no disc is
present when the eject, RSE, or AUX button is
pressed on the radio.
1. Remove the battery compartment door located on
the bottom of the remote control.
2. Replace the two AA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
DVD Distortion
Video distortion may occur when operating cellular
phones, scanners, CB radios, Global Position Systems
(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
3. Close the battery door securely.
It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player
when operating one of these devices in or near the
vehicle.
*Excludes the OnStar® System.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
DVD Display Error Messages
Cleaning the DVD Player
The video screen may display one of the following:
When cleaning the outside DVD faceplate and buttons,
use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water.
Disc Format Error: This message is displayed when a
disc is inserted upside down, not readable, or if the
disc format is not compatible. The disc will be
automatically ejected from the radio.
Cleaning the Video Screen
When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean cloth
dampened with clean water. Use care when directly
touching or cleaning the screen, as damage may result.
Region Code Error: This message will be displayed, if
the disc is not a Region Code 1. The disc will be
automatically ejected from the radio.
No Disc: This message will be displayed, if no disc is
present when the eject, RSE, or AUX button is
pressed on the radio.
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature
Theft-Deterrent Feature
The instructions which follow explain how to enter
your secret code to activate the theft deterrent feature.
Read through all 10 steps before starting the
procedure.
The Radio with Single CD (MP3), the Radio with
Six-Disc CD (MP3), and the DVD Radio have a theft
deterrent feature.
The theft deterrent feature is designed to discourage
theft of your vehicle’s radio. It works by using a secret
code to disable all radio functions whenever battery
power is interrupted.
If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse between
any steps, the radio automatically reverts to time
and you must start the procedure over at Step 4.
1. Write down any four-digit number from 0000 to
9999 and keep it in a safe place separate from
the vehicle.
The theft deterrent feature for the radio may be used or
ignored. If ignored, the radio plays normally and the
radio is not protected by the feature. If the theft deterrent
feature is activated, the radio will not operate if stolen.
2. Turn the ignition to RUN.
3. Turn the radio off.
When the theft deterrent feature is activated. LOCK
will appear on the radio display to indicate a locked
condition anytime battery power has been removed. If
the battery loses power for any reason, you must unlock
the radio with the secret code before it will operate.
4. Press the 5 and 6 pushbuttons at the same time for
five seconds. -- -- -- -- will appear on the display.
Next you will use the secret code number which you
have written down.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Press the SEEK/SCAN down or SEEK left arrow to
make the first digit agree with your code.
Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature
After a Power Loss
6. Press the SEEK/SCAN up or SEEK right arrow to
make the second digit agree with your code.
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
7. Press the TUNE down or AUTO EQ left arrow to
make the third digit agree with your code.
1. Turn the ignition on. -- -- -- -- will appear on the
display.
8. Press the TUNE up or AUTO EQ right arrow to
make the fourth digit agree with your code.
2. Preform Steps 5 through 8 from the “Activating the
Theft-Deterrent Feature” earlier to enter your
secret code.
9. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written
down. The display will prompt you to repeat Steps 5
through 8 to confirm your secret code.
3. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the code
matches the secret code you have written down.
SEC or SECURITY ON will appear on the display,
indicating the radio is now operable and secure.
10. Press AM-FM again. SEC or SECURITY ON will
appear on the display to indicate that the radio is
secure.
If you enter the wrong code, the display will momentarily
show an error message and all radio functions will
continue to be disabled. If -- -- -- -- appears on
If SEC or SECURITY ON does not appear on the
display, but displays Err1, Err2, or LOCK, the
theft deterrent feature is already set to another
code. See “Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature”
later in this section.
the display, you can try to enter your secret code again.
If you enter the wrong code three times, LOCK will
appear on the display. Contact your Saturn retailer. Your
Saturn retailer is authorized to obtain the factory
programmed code that is assigned to the radio to reset
the system.
If you forget your code, if the theft deterrent feature is
accidentally activated with an unknown code, or if the
radio is in the locked mode, contact your Saturn retailer.
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature
Radio Reception
AM
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other. Static
can occur on AM stations caused by things like
storms and power lines. Try reducing the treble to
reduce this noise.
Preform Steps 1 through 9 from the “Activating the
Theft-Deterrent Feature” earlier to enter your secret
code. OFF will appear on the display indicating the theft
deterrent feature is off.
If OFF or SECURITY OFF does not appear on the
display, the wrong code was entered. If you enter the
wrong code, the display will momentarily show an error
message and all radio functions will continue to be
disabled. If -- -- -- -- appears on the display, you can try
to enter your secret code again.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals will
reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to fade in and out.
If you enter the wrong code three times, LOCK will
appear on the display. Contact your Saturn retailer. Your
Saturn retailer is authorized to obtain the factory
programmed code that is assigned to the radio to reset
the system.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast to coast. Just as with FM, tall
buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals,
causing the sound to fade in and out. The radio may
display NO SIGNAL to indicate interference.
If you forget your code, if the theft deterrent feature is
accidentally activated with an unknown code, or if
the radio is in the locked mode, contact your Saturn
retailer.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of Your CDs and DVDs
Fixed Mast Antenna
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen
a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution
and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever
become slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If the
mast is badly bent, replace it.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
tightened to the antenna base located on the hood of
the vehicle. If tightening is required, tighten by hand.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer
edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
Care of the CD and DVD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
The performance of the XM™ system may be affected if
the sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure
that the XM™ satellite antenna is not obstructed.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
safety belts. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing
a seat belt. In addition, avoiding excessive speed,
sudden or abrupt turns, and drunken or aggressive
driving can help make trips safer and avoid the
possibility of a crash, especially a rollover crash. This
section provides many useful tips to help you drive more
safely.
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Whenever we drive, we are taking on an important
responsibility. This is true for any motor
vehicle — passenger car, van, truck, sport utility. Driver
behavior, the driving environment, and the vehicle’s
design all affect how well a vehicle performs. But
statistics show that the most important factor, by far, is
how we drive.
Driving Environment
You can also help avoid a rollover or other type of crash
by being prepared for driving in inclement weather, at
night, or during other times where visibility or traction
may be limited, such as on curves, slippery roads,
or hilly terrain. Unfamiliar surroundings can also have
hidden hazards.
Knowing how these three factors work together can help
you understand how your vehicle handles and what
you can do to avoid many types of crashes, including a
rollover crash.
Driver Behavior
To help you learn more about driving in different
conditions, this section contains information about city,
freeway, and off-road driving, as well as other hints
for driving in various weather conditions.
The single most important thing is this: everyone in the
vehicle, including the driver, should buckle up. See
fact, most serious injuries and fatalities to unbelted
occupants can be reduced or prevented by the use of
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads, or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Vehicle Design
According to the U.S. Department of Transportation,
utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles. Utility vehicles do
have higher ground clearance and a narrower track or
shorter wheelbase than passenger cars, to make
them more capable for off-road driving. Specific design
characteristics like these give the driver a better
view of the road, but also give utility vehicles a higher
center of gravity than other types of vehicles. This
means that you should not expect a utility vehicle to
handle the same way a vehicle with a lower center
of gravity, like a car, would in similar situations.
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, in
both city and rural driving. You never know when
the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn
suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the
But driver behavior factors are far more often the cause
of a utility vehicle rollover than are environmental or
vehicle factors. Safe driver behavior and understanding
the environment in which you will be driving can help
avoid a rollover crash in any type of vehicle, including
utility vehicles.
driving task — such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on
the floor — makes proper defensive driving more difficult
and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury.
Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull off the
road in a safe place to do them yourself. These simple
defensive driving techniques could save your life.
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive
defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too
much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less
than many might think. Although it depends on each
person and situation, here is some general information
on the problem.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle:
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• Judgment
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• Muscular Coordination
• Vision
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,
sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is
0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The
BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States
is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and
how quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in
one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to
react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows
that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash
injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal
cord, or heart. This means that when anyone who has
been drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash,
that person’s chance of being killed or permanently
disabled is higher than if the person had not been
drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go
where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the
steering, and the accelerator. All three systems have to
do their work at the places where the tires meet
the road.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it
is easy to ask more of those control systems than
the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle. See Traction Control System
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of your brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake
force applied.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes. ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
If your vehicle has anti-lock
brakes, this warning light
on the instrument panel will
come on briefly when
you start your vehicle.
When you start your engine, or when you begin to drive
away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself.
You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on, and you may even notice that
your brake pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
a slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise,
but this is normal.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Braking in Emergencies
Traction Control System (TCS)
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation
that requires hard braking.
Your vehicle may have a traction control system that
limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. The system operates only if it senses
that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. When this happens,
If you have anti-lock brakes, you can steer and brake at
the same time. However, if you do not have anti-lock
brakes, your first reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard
and hold it down — may be the wrong thing to do.
Your wheels can stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle
cannot respond to your steering. Momentum will
carry it in whatever direction it was headed when the
wheels stopped rolling. That could be off the road, into
the very thing you were trying to avoid, or into traffic.
the system reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.
This light will come on
when your traction control
system is limiting wheel
spin. See Low Traction
may feel or hear the system
working, but this is normal.
If you do not have anti-lock brakes, use a “squeeze”
braking technique. This will give you maximum braking
while maintaining steering control. You can do this
by pushing on the brake pedal with steadily increasing
pressure.
The traction control system automatically comes on
whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel
spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you should
always leave the system on. But you can turn the
traction control system off if you ever need to. You
should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck
in sand, mud, ice or snow and rocking the vehicle is
required. See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze the
brakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear or
feel the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal.
This will help you retain steering control. If you do have
anti-lock brakes, it is different. See Anti-Lock Brake
In many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle is equipped
with the 2.2L L4 engine,
the traction control system
can be turned off by
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
If your vehicle has all-wheel drive (AWD), the AWD
system operates automatically without any action
required by the driver. If the front drive wheels begin to
slip, the rear wheels will automatically begin to drive
the vehicle as required. There may be a slight
pressing the traction
control button. It is located
on the instrument panel
above the audio system.
engagement noise during hard use but this is normal.
During heavy AWD applications, the engine torque may
be reduced to protect AWD system components. If
the vehicle is exposed to extended heavy AWD usage,
the AWD system will shut itself off to protect the
system from overheating. When the system cools down,
the AWD system will activate itself again automatically;
this cool-down can take up to 20 minutes depending
on outside temperature and vehicle use.
If your vehicle is equipped with the 3.5L V6 engine, the
traction control system will be turned off when the
shift lever is in REVERSE (R) or LOW (L). The traction
control system warning light will be displayed on the
instrument panel. See Traction Control System (TCS)
The traction control system can be activated again
by pressing the traction control button for the
2.2L L4 engine, or by selecting DRIVE (D) or
INTERMEDIATE (I) for the 3.5L V6 engine.
Steering
Electric Power Steering
If the system is limiting wheel spin when you press the
button, the system will not turn off until there is no
longer a current need to limit wheel spin. You can turn
the system back on at any time by pressing the
button again. If the traction control warning light does
not come on, you may not have traction control and your
vehicle should be serviced at a retailer.
If the engine stalls while you are driving, the power
steering assist system will continue to operate until you
are able to stop your vehicle. If you lose power
steering assist because the electric power steering
system is not functioning, you can steer, but it will take
more effort.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you turn the steering wheel in either direction several
times until it stops, or hold the steering wheel in the
stopped position for an extended amount of time, you
may notice a reduced amount of power steering assist.
The normal amount of power steering assist should return
shortly after a few normal steering movements.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both control
systems — steering and braking — have to do their work
where the tires meet the road. Unless you have
four-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the hard braking can
demand too much of those places. You can lose control.
The electric power steering system does not require
regular maintenance. If you suspect steering system
problems and/or the Service Vehicle Soon light comes
on, contact your retailer for service repairs.
The same thing can happen if you are steering through
a sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Those
two control systems — steering and acceleration — can
overwhelm those places where the tires meet the
road and make you lose control. See Traction Control
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way
you want it to go, and slow down.
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering around the
problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes — but, unless you
have anti-lock, not enough to lock your wheels.
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off
the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re
driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides and
to crossroads for situations that might affect your
passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever
about making a successful pass, wait for a better
time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass, providing the road ahead is clear.
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
change signal and move back into the right lane.
Remember that your right outside mirror is convex.
The vehicle you just passed may seem to be
farther away from you than it really is.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For
one thing, following too closely reduces your area
of vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
do not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into
the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you
will have a running start that more than makes up
for the distance you would lose by dropping
back. And if something happens to cause you to
cancel your pass, you need only slow down
and drop back again and wait for another
opportunity.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it
may be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
and check the blind spot.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far
enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front
in your inside mirror, activate your right lane
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored surface — and
slow down when you have any doubt.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
If you have the Traction Control System (TCS),
remember: It helps avoid only the acceleration skid. See
do not have this system, or if the system is off, then an
acceleration skid is also best handled by easing
your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If you have the anti-lock braking system (ABS),
remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid. If you do
not have ABS, then in a braking skid, where the
wheels are no longer rolling, release enough pressure
on the brakes to get the wheels rolling again. This
restores steering control. Push the brake pedal down
steadily when you have to stop suddenly. As long as the
wheels are rolling, you will have steering control.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
“Off-roading” means you have left the North American
road system behind. Traffic lanes are not marked.
Curves are not banked. There are no road signs.
Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or downhill. In
short, you have gone right back to nature.
Operating Your All-Wheel-Drive
Vehicle Off Paved Roads
This off-road guide is for vehicles that have all-wheel
drive. If your vehicle does not have all-wheel drive, you
should not drive off-road unless you are on a level,
solid surface.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that is
why it is very important that you read this guide. You will
find many driving tips and suggestions. These will
help make your off-road driving safer and more
enjoyable.
Many of the same design features that help make your
vehicle responsive on paved roads during poor weather
conditions — features like all-wheel drive — help make it
much better suited for off-road use. Its higher ground
clearance also helps your vehicle step over some off-road
obstacles. But your vehicle does not have features like
special underbody shielding and a transfer case low gear
range, things that are usually thought necessary for
extended or severe off-road service.
Before You Go Off-Roading
There are some things to do before you go out. For
example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance
and service work done. Is there enough fuel? Is
the spare tire fully inflated? Are the fluid levels up where
they should be? What are the local laws that apply to
off-roading where you will be driving? If you do not
know, you should check with law enforcement people in
the area. Will you be on someone’s private land? If
so, be sure to get the necessary permission.
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have
some definite hazards. The greatest of these is
the terrain itself.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road
Driving
CAUTION: (Continued)
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.
• Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
tossed about when driving over rough
terrain. You or your passengers can be
struck by flying objects. Secure the cargo
properly.
• The heaviest things should be on the load floor and
forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as far
forward as you can.
• Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making it more likely to
roll over. You can be seriously or fatally
injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy
loads inside the cargo area, not on the
roof. Keep cargo in the cargo area as far
forward and low as possible.
• Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on
the off-road terrain does not toss things around.
{CAUTION:
• Cargo on the load floor piled higher than
the seatbacks can be thrown forward
during a sudden stop. You or your
passengers could be injured. Keep cargo
below the top of the seatbacks.
You will find other important information in this manual.
CAUTION: (Continued)
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Environmental Concerns
Traveling to Remote Areas
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every
off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting
the environment:
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your
route. You are much less likely to get bad surprises.
Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of
any blocked or closed roads.
• Always use established trails, roads and areas that
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational driving; obey all posted regulations.
It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other
can help quickly.
• Avoid any driving practice that could damage the
environment — shrubs, flowers, trees,
grasses — or disturb wildlife (this includes
wheel-spinning, breaking down trees or
unnecessary driving through streams or over soft
ground).
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe
and close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-road driving does require some new and different
driving skills. Here is what we mean.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your
eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain
for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen
for unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms,
hands, feet and body, you will need to respond to
vibrations and vehicle bounce.
• Always carry a litter bag — make sure all refuse is
removed from any campsite before leaving.
• Take extreme care with open fires (where
permitted), camp stoves and lanterns.
• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials that could catch fire from
the heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-road
driving. One of the best ways to control your vehicle
is to control your speed. Here are some things to keep
in mind. At higher speeds:
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds
of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain
and its many different features. Here are some things to
consider.
• you approach things faster and you have less time
to scan the terrain for obstacles.
Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take you over
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow
or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,
acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different
ways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on,
you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,
delayed acceleration, poor traction and longer braking
distances.
• you have less time to react.
• you have more vehicle bounce when you drive over
obstacles.
• you will need more distance for braking, especially
since you are on an unpaved surface.
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can
be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can startle
you if you are not prepared for them. Often these
obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even
the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are some
things to consider:
{CAUTION:
When you are driving off-road, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw
you out of position. This could cause you to
lose control and crash. So, whether you are
driving on or off the road, you and your
passengers should wear safety belts.
• Is the path ahead clear?
• Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
There is more discussion of these subjects later.
• Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction
quickly?
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs or
other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your
hands if you are not prepared.
Driving on Off-Road Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up, down or across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment
and understanding of what your vehicle can and cannot
do. There are some hills that simply cannot be driven,
no matter how well built the vehicle.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,
your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens,
even with one or two wheels, you cannot control the
vehicle as well or at all.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns or sudden braking.
{CAUTION:
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you cannot control your speed. If
you drive across them, you will roll over. You
could be seriously injured or killed. If you have
any doubt about the steepness, do not drive
the hill.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of
alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.
There are no road signs, posted speed limits or
signal lights. You have to use your own good judgment
about what is safe and what is not.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving. At the
very time you need special alertness and driving
skills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You
could have a serious — or even fatal — accident if you
drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Approaching a Hill
Driving Uphill
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it is
one of those hills that is just too steep to climb, descend
or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very
small hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant
incline with only a small change in elevation where
you can easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill,
the incline may get steeper as you near the top, but
you may not see this because the crest of the hill
is hidden by bushes, grass or shrubs.
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you
need to take some special steps.
• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering
wheel.
• Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
your speed. Do not use more power than you
need, because you do not want your wheels to start
spinning or sliding.
Here are some other things to consider as you approach
a hill.
• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
sharply steeper in places?
• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. If
the path twists and turns, you might want to find
another route.
• Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?
• Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
will not have to make turning maneuvers?
• Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your
path, such as boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?
• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and walk
the hill if you do not know. It is the smart way to
find out.
{CAUTION:
Turning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When driving up
hills, always try to go straight up.
• Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of
the hill.
• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because
they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more
visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or is about
to stall, and I cannot make it up the hill?
• Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill
to let opposing traffic know you are there.
A: If this happens, there are some things you should
do, and there are some things you must not do?
First, here is what you should do:
• Use your headlamps even during the day. They
make you more visible to oncoming traffic.
• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep
it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the parking
brake.
{CAUTION:
• If your engine is still running, shift the transaxle to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed
can cause an accident. There could be a
drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even another
vehicle. You could be seriously injured or
killed. As you near the top of a hill, slow down
and stay alert.
• If your engine has stopped running, you will need to
restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the transaxle
to PARK (P) (or, shift to NEUTRAL if you have a
manual transaxle) and restart the engine. Then shift
to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill as straight as possible in
REVERSE (R).
• As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand
on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position.
This way you will be able to tell if your wheels are
straight and maneuver as you back down. It is
best that you back down the hill with your wheels
straight rather than in the left or right direction.
Turning the wheel too far to the left or right
will increase the possibility of a rollover.
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some things you must not do if you stall, or
are about to stall, when going up a hill.
Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down the
hill and decide I just cannot do it. What should
I do?
• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
NEUTRAL (N) (or pressing the clutch if you
have a manual transaxle) to rev-up the engine and
regain forward momentum. This will not work.
Your vehicle will roll backwards very quickly and
you could go out of control.
A: Set the parking brake, put your transaxle in
PARK (P) (or FIRST (1) if you have a manual
transaxle) and turn off the engine. Leave the vehicle
and go get some help. Exit on the uphill side and
stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if
it rolled downhill.
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the
vehicle. Then apply the parking brake. Shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake,
and slowly back straight down.
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you will want to
consider a number of things:
• Never attempt to turn around if you are about to
stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep
enough to stall your vehicle, it is steep enough to
cause you to roll over if you turn around. If you
cannot make it up the hill you must back straight
down the hill.
• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain
vehicle control?
• What’s the surface like? Smooth? Rough? Slippery?
Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
Boulders?
• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden
creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks?
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to
keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a
low gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakes
and they will not have to do all the work. Descend
slowly, keeping your vehicle under control at all times.
Q: Are there some things I should not do when
driving down a hill?
A: Yes! These are important because if you ignore
them you could lose control and have a serious
accident.
• When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across the incline of the hill. A hill that is not too
steep to drive down may be too steep to drive
across. You could roll over if you do not drive
straight down.
{CAUTION:
Heavy braking when going down a hill can
cause your brakes to overheat and fade. This
could cause loss of control and a serious
accident. Apply the brakes lightly when
descending a hill and use a low gear to keep
vehicle speed under control.
• Never go downhill with the transaxle in
NEUTRAL (N). This is called “free wheeling.” Your
brakes will have to do all the work and could
overheat and fade.
• Unless you have anti-lock brakes, avoid braking so
hard that you lock the wheels when going downhill.
If your wheels are locked, you cannot steer your
vehicle. If your wheels lock up during downhill
braking, you may feel the vehicle starting to slide
sideways. To regain your direction, just ease off the
brakes and steer to keep the front of the vehicle
pointing straight downhill.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Also, driving across an incline puts more weight on
the downhill wheels. This could cause a downhill
slide or a rollover.
Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?
A: It is much more likely to happen going uphill. But if
it happens going downhill, here is what to do.
• Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive
across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even wet
grass can cause your tires to slip sideways, downhill.
If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something that
will trip it — a rock, a rut, etc. — and roll over.
1. Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.
Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift to PARK (P) (or NEUTRAL if you have a
manual transaxle) and, while still braking, restart
the engine.
• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with the
uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut
or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.
3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help.
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully
whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because the
trail goes across the incline does not mean you have to
drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over.
Driving Across an Incline
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go across
the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to
decide whether to try to drive across the incline. Here
are some things to consider:
{CAUTION:
• A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be
too steep to drive across. When you go straight up or
down a hill, the length of the wheel base — the
distance from the front wheels to the rear
Driving across an incline that is too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any
doubt about the steepness of the incline, do
not drive across it. Find another route instead.
wheels — reduces the likelihood the vehicle will
tumble end over end. But when you drive across an
incline, the much more narrow track width — the
distance between the left and right wheels — may
not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over.
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stalling on an Incline
Q: What if I am driving across an incline that is not
too steep, but I hit some loose gravel and start
to slide downhill. What should I do?
If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an incline,
be sure you, and any passengers, get out on the
uphill side, even if the door there is harder to open. If
you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to
roll over, you will be right in its path.
A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways,
turn downhill. This should help straighten out the
vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However,
a much better way to prevent this is to get out and
“walk the course” so you know what the surface
is like before you drive it.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
{CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a
vehicle stopped across an incline is
dangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you could
be crushed or killed. Always get out on the
uphill (high) side of the vehicle and stay well
clear of the rollover path.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice
{CAUTION:
When you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels will
not get good traction. You cannot accelerate as
quickly, turning is more difficult, and you will need longer
braking distances.
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or rivers can
be dangerous. Underwater springs, currents
under the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the
ice. Your vehicle could fall through the ice and
you and your passengers could drown. Drive
your vehicle on safe surfaces only.
It is best to use a low gear when you are in mud — the
deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep
mud, the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you do
not get stuck.
When you drive on sand, you will sense a change in
wheel traction. But it will depend upon how loosely
packed the sand is. On loosely packed sand, such as
on beaches or sand dunes, your tires will tend to
sink into the sand. This has an effect on steering,
accelerating and braking. Drive at a reduced speed and
avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Driving in Water
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters
demand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is before you drive through
it. If it is deep enough to cover your wheel hubs,
axles or exhaust pipe, do not try it — you probably will
not get through. Also, water that deep can damage
your axle and other vehicle parts.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control.
On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you
will have difficulty accelerating. And, if you do get
moving, poor steering and difficult braking can cause
you to slide out of control.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it. At
faster speeds, water splashes on your ignition
system and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also
occur if you get your tailpipe under water. And, as long
as your tailpipe is under water, you will never be
able to start your engine. When you go through water,
remember that when your brakes get wet, it may
take you longer to stop.
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the
underbody, chassis or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires and exhaust
system for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and
cooling system for any leakage.
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
for additional information.
Driving through rushing water can be
dangerous. Deep water can sweep your vehicle
downstream and you and your passengers
could drown. If it is only shallow water, it can
still wash away the ground from under your
tires, and you could lose traction and roll the
vehicle over. Do not drive through rushing
water.
more information on driving through water.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
Driving at Night
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But
as we get older these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your
eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They
may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare, as from a driver
who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
your eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and
are not even aware of it.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread
left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise to
go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road,
and even people walking.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on
the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before you
hit them.
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
Driving Through Flowing Water
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and
raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If
you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
on page 5-55.
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
City Driving
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
Freeway Driving
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check
traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with
the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the
prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your
mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways — are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your blind spot.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to
move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you
will find experienced and able service experts at
Saturn retailers all across North America. They will be
ready and willing to help if you need it.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are
going slower than you actually are.
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
Highway Hypnosis
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do
not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
Hill and Mountain Roads
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your
engine and transaxle, and you can climb the
hill better.
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or
an accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks
area, or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be
driving under severe conditions, include a small bag
of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags
to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure
these items in your vehicle.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You
will have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be
very careful.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If
you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
Your anti-lock brake system (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
slippery road. Even though you have ABS, you will want
to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry
page 4-8.
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such
as around clumps of trees, behind buildings,
or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve
or an overpass may remain icy when the
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it may offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall. Try
to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of
ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not
to brake while you are actually on the ice, and
avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as rocking
can help you get out when you are stuck, but you
must use caution.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That
will clear the area around your front wheels. If your
vehicle has traction control, you should turn the system
Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a
forward gear, or with a manual transaxle, between
FIRST (1) or SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R), spinning
the wheels as little as possible. Release the accelerator
pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the
accelerator pedal when the transaxle is in gear. By
slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and reverse
directions, you will cause a rocking motion that may
free your vehicle. If that does not get you out after a few
tries, you may need to be towed out. Or, you can use
the recovery hook if your vehicle has one. If you do need
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured.
And, the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle
can overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When you
are stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible.
Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h)
as shown on the speedometer.
Vehicles Equipped with VTi Variable
Transmission
If you press too hard on the accelerator pedal, you may
not be able to shift into DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).
If this happens, release the accelerator pedal, then shift
to the gear you want.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back
and forth, you can destroy your transaxle. See
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
4-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recovery Hook
Contact your retailer if you would like to have a recovery
hook installed on your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
The recovery hook, when used, is under a lot
of force. Always pull the vehicle straight out.
Never pull on the hook at a sideways angle.
The hook could break off and you or others
could be injured from the chain or cable
snapping back.
The recovery hook is located at the rear of your vehicle.
It can only be used for pulling your vehicle out if it is
stuck, not for towing the vehicle.
Notice: Never use the recovery hook to tow the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it would
not be covered by warranty.
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire and Loading Information Label
Loading Your Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly
carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the
Certification/Tire label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
Example Label
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is
attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). With the driver’s
door open, you will find the label attached below
the door lock post (striker). The tire and loading
information label shows the number of occupant seating
positions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacity
weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the
size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more
4-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle.
See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this section.
information on towing a trailer, towing safety rules and
trailering tips.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
Example 1
Item
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
Total
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 2
Description
Example 3
Description
Item
Total
Item
Total
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
B
C
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
B
C
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label
for specific information about your vehicle’s capacity
weight and seating positions. The combined weight of
the driver, passengers and cargo should never
exceed your vehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity weight.
4-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To find out the actual loads on your front and rear
axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your
vehicle. Your retailer can help you with this. Be sure
to spread out your load equally on both sides of
the centerline.
Certification/Tire Label
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR
for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out.
Similar looking vehicles may have different GVWRs and
payloads. Please consult your vehicle’s Certification/Tire
label or your retailer for additional details.
{CAUTION:
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached to
the rear edge of the driver’s door. The label shows
the proper size and speed rating of your vehicle’s
original tires, as well as the inflation pressures needed
to obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle.
This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel, cargo, and trailer tongue weight, if your
vehicle is pulling a trailer.
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Using heavier suspension components to get added
durability might not change your vehicle’s weight ratings.
4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ask your retailer to help you load your vehicle correctly
if you are using these components.
Towing
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
If you put things inside your vehicle – like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else – they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
{CAUTION:
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your
vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly
towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on
the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a
“dolly”).
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing” following in this section.
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
4-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
Dinghy Towing (Front-Wheel-Drive with
Manual Transaxle, Four-Speed
Automatic Transaxle or Five-Speed
Automatic Transaxle, and All-Wheel
Drive with Five-Speed Automatic
Transaxle)
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
Front-wheel-drive vehicles equipped with a manual
transaxle, four-speed automatic transaxle or five-speed
automatic transaxle may be dinghy towed from the
front. These vehicles may also be towed by putting the
front wheels on a dolly. See “Dolly Towing” later in
this section.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be
page 4-36.
All-wheel-drive vehicles with the five-speed automatic
transaxle can be dinghy towed from the front. You
can also tow these vehicles by placing them on
a platform trailer with all four wheels off of the ground.
These vehicles cannot be towed using a dolly.
Dinghy Towing (All-Wheel Drive with
VTi Transaxle)
All-wheel-drive vehicles with the VTi transaxle should
not be towed with all four wheels on the ground.
To properly tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle with the VTi
transaxle, it should be placed on a platform trailer
with all four wheels off of the ground.
4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. If your vehicle has the manual transaxle, shift your
transaxle to NEUTRAL and let the engine run for
three minutes, then turn it off.
If your vehicle has the five-speed automatic
transaxle, shift your transaxle from AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D) to NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine run for three minutes. Then turn it off.
Notice: Towing your vehicle after shifting the
automatic transaxle (four-speed or five-speed) from
anything other than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D)
to NEUTRAL (N) can cause internal damage to
the automatic transaxle. Always shift the automatic
transaxle (four-speed or five-speed) from
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) to NEUTRAL (N) as the
last shift before towing.
To tow your vehicle from the front with all four wheels
on the ground, do the following:
5. Locate and remove the large IGN fuse from the
underhood fuse block. See Underhood Fuse
1. Position and attach the vehicle to tow it behind the
recreational vehicle.
Notice: If you tow your vehicle without performing
each of the steps listed under “Dinghy Towing,”
you could damage the automatic transaxle. Be sure
to follow all steps of the dinghy towing procedure
prior to and after towing your vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition key to ACC.
3. Turn fog lamps and all accessories off.
4-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If your vehicle has a four-speed automatic
transaxle, it can be dinghy towed from the front
for unlimited miles at 65 mph (105 km/h). If you
exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towing your vehicle,
it could be damaged. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Never exceed 65 mph
(105 km/h) while towing your vehicle.
Once you have reached your destination, do the
following:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Shift the transaxle to FIRST (1) for manual
transaxle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK and remove the key
from the ignition.
Notice: If your vehicle has a five-speed automatic
transaxle and it is towed for more than eight
hours per day or at speeds greater than 65 mph
(105 km/h), you could damage the automatic
transaxle. The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not tow your vehicle for extended
periods of time or at speeds greater than 65 mph
(105 km/h).
4. Reinstall the large IGN fuse.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage the
transaxle. Be sure that the transaxle fluid is at the
proper level before towing with all four wheels
on the ground.
Notice: Don’t tow a vehicle with the front drive
wheels on the ground if one of the front tires is a
compact spare tire. Towing with two different
tire sizes on the front of the vehicle can cause
severe damage to the transaxle.
After eight hours of towing, repeat Step 4 above for
five-speed automatic transaxle.
Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)
All-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with two
wheels on the ground. To properly tow these vehicles,
they should be placed on a platform trailer with all
four wheels off of the ground.
4-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
Dolly Towing (Front-Wheel-Drive
Vehicles)
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for towing.
5. Release the parking brake.
Towing Your Vehicle From the Rear
To tow your front-wheel-drive vehicle from the front with
two wheels on the ground, do the following:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. If you have a five-speed automatic transaxle,
four-speed automatic transaxle or VTi variable
transaxle, move the shift lever to PARK (P). If you
have a manual transaxle, move the shift lever
to SECOND (2).
Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rear could
damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by the
warranty. Never have your vehicle towed from
the rear.
4-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not tow a trailer if your vehicle is equipped with the
Red Line package. You can damage your vehicle. If
you are not sure if your vehicle is equipped with the Red
Line package, contact your retailer.
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify what
the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability
and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes
correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with your vehicle.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
by your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow
the advice in this part and see your retailer for
important information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.
transmission, rear axle, wheel assemblies and tires are
forced to work harder against the drag of the added
weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively
higher speeds and under greater loads, generating extra
heat. What’s more, the trailer adds considerably to
wind resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.
4-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If you have a VTi variable transaxle, you can use
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) or as you need to
INTERMEDIATE (I).
If You Do Decide to Pull a Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
• If you have a manual transaxle, you should not use
FIFTH (5) gear. Drive in FOURTH (4) gear or as
you need to a lower gear.
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speed
for trailers, or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h),
to save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later
in this section.
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged. The
• Don’t tow a trailer when the outside temperature is
above 100°F (38°C).
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• the weight of the trailer
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires
• If you have an automatic transaxle, you can use
INTERMEDIATE (I) or as you need to, a lower
gear which will minimize heat buildup and extend
the life of your transaxle.
4-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
And if you tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load
to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying
for more information about your vehicle’s maximum
load capacity.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than 1,500 lbs (680 kg) for
the 2.2L L4 engine and 3500 lbs (1587 kg) for the
3.5L V6 engine. But even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend
on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
Do not tow a trailer if your vehicle is equipped with
the Red Line package. If you are not sure if your vehicle
is equipped with the Red Line package, contact your
retailer.
You can ask your retailer for trailering information or
advice.
If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B). If you’re using a weight-distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of
the total loaded trailer weight (B).
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,
passengers or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will
also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow.
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights
are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them
right simply by moving some items around in the
trailer.
4-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Safety Chains
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You will find these numbers on the
Tire-Loading Information label found on the rear edge of
the driver’s side rear door or see Loading Your
the GVW limit for your vehicle or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR), including the weight of the trailer
tongue.
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to
the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the
hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper.
Always leave just enough slack so you can turn
with your rig. And, never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you will need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:
Trailer Brakes
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, don’t try to tap into
your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. If you do,
both brake systems won’t work well, or at all.
• The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the
bumper.
Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer
brakes, so you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain
them properly.
• Will you have to make any holes in the body of
your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If
you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when
you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get
page 2-27. Dirt and water can, too.
4-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving with a Trailer
Passing
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer when towing a trailer, you’ll need to go much
farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return
to your lane.
Backing Up
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Making Turns
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
Following Distance
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
4-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
Driving on Grades
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. See your
retailer if you need information. The arrows on your
instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or
lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps
will also flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes or stop.
Notice: Do not tow on steep continuous grades
exceeding 6 miles (9.6 km). Extended, higher
than normal engine and transaxle temperatures may
result and damage your vehicle. Frequent stops
are very important to allow the engine and transaxle
to cool.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your
speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the
possibility of the engine and the transmission
overheating. If your engine does overheat, see Engine
4-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. When the chocks are in place, release the regular
brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
Parking on Hills
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and shift into PARK (P) for an
automatic transaxle or REVERSE (R) for a manual
transaxle.
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
5. Release the regular brakes.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
• start your engine,
• shift into a gear, and
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) for an automatic transaxle, or into gear for
a manual transaxle.
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
When parking uphill, turn your wheels away from
the curb. When parking downhill, turn your wheels
into the curb.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
2. Have someone place chocks behind the trailer
wheels.
4-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Trailer Wiring
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
page 6-4 for more information. Things that are especially
important in trailer operation are automatic transaxle
fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, drive belt,
cooling system and brake system. Each of these is
covered in this manual, and the Index will help you find
them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to
review this information before you start your trip.
Additional wire length has been provided for connecting
trailer wiring to your vehicle. A loop of five wires is
stored below the jack, which is located on the driver’s
side of the cargo area. The wires are fused in both
the underhood and instrument fuse block. See
The wires do not have a connector and should be wired
to the trailer by a qualified electrical technician. The
technician can use the following information when
connecting a trailer wiring harness to your vehicle.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
• Yellow: Left Turn Signal
• Brown: Parking Lamps
• Light Blue: Stop Lamps
• Black: Ground Wire
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during
page 5-29.
Changing a Tire When Trailer Towing
• Dark Green: Right Turn Signal
If you get a flat tire while towing a trailer, be sure
to secure the trailer and disconnect it from the vehicle
before changing the tire.
When connecting a trailer harness, be sure you leave it
loose enough so the wiring does not bend or break,
but not so loose that it drags on the ground. Store
harness below jack in the cargo area when it is not in
use. Wrap the harness together and tie it neatly so it will
not be damaged.
4-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Service
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
Your Saturn retailer knows your vehicle best and wants
you to be happy with it. We hope you will go to your
retailer for all your service needs. You will get genuine
Saturn parts and Saturn-trained and supported
service people.
We hope you will want to keep your Saturn vehicle all
Saturn.
Genuine Saturn parts have one of these marks.
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
page 7-9.
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind
noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check
with your retailer before adding equipment to the
outside of your vehicle.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gasoline Specifications
Fuel
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by automobile manufacturers
around the world and contained in the World-Wide Fuel
Charter which is available from the Alliance of Automobile
Manufacturers at www.autoalliance.org/fuel_charter.htm.
Gasoline meeting these specifications could provide
improved driveability and emission control system
performance compared to other gasoline.
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
of 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may
get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damage
your engine. A little pinging noise when you accelerate
or drive uphill is considered normal. This does not
indicate a problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel is
necessary. If you are using 87 octane or higher-octane
fuel and hear heavy knocking, your engine needs
service.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Fuel
Additives
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp may turn on and your vehicle may fail a
page 3-32. If this occurs, return to your authorized
Saturn retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined that the
condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work
properly. In most cases, you should not have to add
anything to your fuel. However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of additive required to
meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
General Motors recommends that you buy gasolines
that are advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intake
valves clean. If your vehicle experiences problems
due to dirty injectors or valves, try a different brand of
gasoline. Also, your retailer has additives that will
help correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if
they comply with the specifications described earlier.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does
not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and
the performance of the emission control system may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.
If this occurs, return to your authorized Saturn retailer
for service.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle — this
is against the law in some places. Keep
children away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released
too soon, it will spring back to the right.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise
to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
page 3-32.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel
to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the handle located
under the instrument
panel on the driver’s
side of the vehicle.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and lift up on the
secondary hood release lever.
3. Lift the hood, release the hood prop from its
retainer and put the hood prop into the slot marked
PROP ROD.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the
hood prop. Remove the hood prop from the slot in the
hood and return the prop to its retainer. Then just let the
hood down and close it firmly.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
on page 5-96.
B. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
page 5-40.
H. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See “Checking Coolant”
I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-35.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you open the hood on the 3.5L V6 (L66) engine, you will see the following:
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Oil
B. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap (Out of View). See “When to Add
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop for the
2.2L L4 engine and an orange loop for the 3.5L V6
page 5-12 for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
on page 5-96.
F. Remote Positive (+) Terminal (Out of View). See
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
G. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See “Checking Coolant”
H. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-35.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the oil is below the MIN (minimum) mark for the 2.2L L4
engine or below the lower mark (B) for the 3.5L V6
engine, you will need to add at least one quart/liter of oil.
But you must use the right kind. This section explains
what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity,
When to Add Engine Oil
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the upper
mark that shows the proper operating range,
your engine could be damaged.
2.2L L4 (L61) Engine
2.2L L4 (L61) Engine
3.5L V6 (L66) Engine
the location of the engine oil fill cap.
3.5L V6 (L66) Engine
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• SAE 5W-30
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
For Vehicles with the 2.2L L4 (L61)
Engine Only
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
For Vehicles with the 3.5L V6 (L66)
Engine Only
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-20 is best for
your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or
thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils such as
SAE 20W-50.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you
must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
necessary. A change engine oil light will come on. See
oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving under
the best conditions, the oil life system may not indicate
that an oil change is necessary for over a year.
However, your engine oil and filter must be changed at
least once a year and at this time the system must
be reset. Your retailer has trained service people who
will perform this work using genuine Saturn parts
and reset the system. It is also important to check your
oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
Notice: Use only engine oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oil
with the starburst symbol are all you will need for
good performance and engine protection.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a
change engine oil light being turned on, reset the
system.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask
your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center
for help.
After changing the engine oil, reset the system by
performing the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition key to RUN with the engine off.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal three
times within five seconds.
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
If the change engine oil light is flashing, the system
is reset. The light will flash for up to 30 seconds
or until the ignition is turned off.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
If the light comes on again and stays on for 30 seconds
at the next ignition cycle, it did not reset. You will
need to reset the system again.
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose
dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new
filter is required.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do the
following:
2. Disconnect the hose.
1. Unscrew the clamp on the air duct hose.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Release the clamps on the side of the air cleaner
assembly.
5. Remove the air cleaner cover assembly and air
filter element.
4. Rotate the cover upward to disengage the cover
hinges.
6. Inspect or replace the air filter element.
If the air filter element is dirty, you should replace it.
If it is only dusty, it may be cleaned by blowing
compressed air through it from the clean side.
Make sure you are away from the engine
compartment when cleaning the air filter with
compressed air.
Wipe all dust from inside of the housing and inspect
the air cleaner and air outlet duct for cracks, cuts
and deterioration. The air outlet duct must be
replaced if damaged.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Reverse Steps 1 through 5 to reinstall the engine
air cleaner/filter cover and air duct hose.
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
(2.2L L4 Engine)
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transaxle Fluid
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The
air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to
stop flame if the engine backfires. If it is not
there and the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with it off, and be careful
working on the engine with the air
A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change the fluid at the intervals listed in Additional
transaxle fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and
How to Check Automatic
Transaxle Fluid
cleaner/filter off.
If your vehicle is equipped with the 2.2L L4 engine, you
will have to have this procedure done at your retailer’s
service department.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transaxle
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always
use the automatic transaxle fluid listed in
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage the
transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the
fluid could come out and fall on hot engine or
exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid
could cause the transaxle to overheat. Be sure
to get an accurate reading if you check the
transaxle fluid.
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
(3.5L V6 Engine)
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transaxle Fluid
A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle
fluid level if you have been driving:
Change the fluid at the intervals listed in Additional
transaxle fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and
• When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
• At high speed for quite a while.
• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
• While pulling a trailer.
How to Check Automatic Transaxle
Fluid
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at your retailer’s service
department.
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
(10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), you may have to
drive longer.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking the Fluid Level
How to Add Automatic Transaxle Fluid
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of transaxle fluid to use. See Recommended
• Park your vehicle on a level place.
• Warm the engine to normal operating temperature
until the electric radiator fan turns on at least once.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area on the
dipstick.
• With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
1. Pull out the dipstick.
• With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the
dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It does not take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
Then, turn off the engine and follow these steps:
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transaxle
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always
use the automatic transaxle fluid listed in
The transaxle fluid dipstick handle is the black loop near
the rear of the engine compartment, toward the
center.
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or
paper towel.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transaxle Fluid,” earlier in this section.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be between the upper
mark and the lower mark.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Transaxle Fluid
Engine Coolant
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level. A
transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.
If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to your retailer’s service
department and have it repaired as soon as possible.
for the proper fluid to use.
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 100,000 miles
(166 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
page 5-29.
Notice: Use of manual transaxle fluid other than
that listed in the Maintenance Schedule may damage
your vehicle, and the damages may not be covered
by your warranty. Always use the correct manual
transaxle fluid in your vehicle. See Recommended
manual transaxle fluid.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
Hydraulic Clutch
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is
self-adjusting. The hydraulic clutch system does not
have its own reservoir. The system receives fluid from
the brake master cylinder reservoir. It is filled with
information.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your retailer check your cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do not
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Coolant
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the COLD
line. When your engine is warm, the level should be
at the COLD line or a little higher.
The surge tank is located on the driver’s side of the
engine compartment. See Engine Compartment
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
for instructions on “How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank.”
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight.
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
If you replace your coolant surge tank pressure cap, a
Saturn cap is required.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage and a coolant
temperature warning light on your vehicle’s instrument
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for three minutes while you are parked. If you still
have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone
out of the vehicle until it cools down.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer.
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. If you have an air conditioner and it is on, turn it off.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
3. Try to minimize engine load. If you are in a traffic
jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N); otherwise, shift to the
highest gear possible while driving.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about ten minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues and you have not stopped, pull
over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
A. Electric Engine Fan
B. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If
you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, do
not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
The coolant level should be at the COLD line. If it is not,
you may have a leak at the radiator hoses, heater
hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else in the
cooling system.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check to
see if the electric engine cooling fan is running. If the
engine is overheating, the fan should be running. If it is
not, your vehicle needs service. Turn off the engine.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
CAUTION: (Continued)
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause your engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
Never turn the cap when the cooling system,
including the coolant surge tank pressure cap,
is hot. Wait for the cooling system and coolant
surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever
have to turn the pressure cap.
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at the COLD line, add a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be sure the
cooling system, including the coolant surge tank
pressure cap, is cool before you do it. See Engine
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant
surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they
can come out at high speed.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap
when the cooling system, including the coolant surge
tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no
longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise (left) about one-quarter of a turn.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. This will
allow any pressure still left to be vented out
the discharge hose.
{CAUTION:
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture, to the COLD line.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the
COLD line.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight.
Check the level in the surge tank when the cooling
system has cooled down. If the coolant is not at
the proper level, repeat Steps 1 through 3 and reinstall
the pressure cap. If the coolant still is not at the
proper level when the system cools down again, see
your retailer.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
When you need windshield or rear window washer fluid,
be sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before
use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area
where the temperature may fall below freezing, use a
fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
Adding Windshield Washer Fluid
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
the location of the
{CAUTION:
reservoir.
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes will not work
well, or will not work at all.
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake
warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
What to Add
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system
parts so badly that they will have to be replaced.
Do not let someone put in the wrong kind of
fluid.
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
page 6-14.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Appearance
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or
they may not even work at all. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake
fluid.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to Saturn torque specifications.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has front disc brakes and rear drum
brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving, except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly.
Your rear drum brakes do not have wear indicators, but
if you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise, have the
rear brake linings inspected immediately. Also, the rear
brake drums should be removed and inspected each
time the tires are removed for rotation or changing.
When you have the front brake pads replaced, have the
rear brakes inspected, too.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
{CAUTION:
Brake Pedal Travel
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear the
brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
See your retailer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a moderate brake stop, your brakes
adjust for wear. If you rarely make a moderate or heavier
stop, then your brakes might not adjust correctly. If you
drive in that way, then — very carefully — make a few
moderate brake stops about every 1,000 miles
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
(1 600 km), so your brakes will adjust properly.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When you replace parts of your braking system — for
example, when your brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
Saturn replacement parts. If you do not, your brakes may
no longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between your front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance you have come to
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts
in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Vehicle Storage
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or
more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from the
battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
page 5-40 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, get one that has the replacement
number shown on the original battery’s label. We
recommend an ACDelco® replacement battery. See
location.
Also, for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do
it safely.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in
NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And
it could save the radio!
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
that vehicle.
Open the hood on your vehicle and find the remote
positive (+) and remote negative (−) jump starting
terminals.
The remote positive (+) terminal is located in the
engine compartment on the driver’s side of the
vehicle, on the underhood fuse block. See Engine
information on location.
Access the remote
positive (+) terminal by
removing the fuse
block cover.
The remote negative (−) terminal is located toward
the rear of the engine compartment, on the
driver’s side of the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
{CAUTION:
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
The positive (+) terminal on your vehicle is located
on the underhood fuse block.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Press the unlock symbol on the remote keyless
entry transmitter to disarm your security system,
if equipped.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
12. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If
it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) terminal
for this purpose.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the underhood fuse block cover to its
original position.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Lubricant
All-Wheel Drive
If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure to
perform the lubricant checks described in this section.
There are two additional systems that need lubrication.
Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit
for 2.2L L4 Engine)
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See Scheduled
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the transfer case, you’ll need to add
some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level
to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
Transfer Case (3.5L V6 Engine)
When to Check and Change Lubricant
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
A fluid loss could indicate a problem; check and have it
repaired, if needed.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
A. Fill Plug
B. Drain Plug
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp Aiming
Bulb Replacement
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
page 5-53.
If your vehicle is damaged in an accident, the headlamp
aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the low-beam
headlamps may be necessary if it is difficult to see
the lane markers (for horizontal aim), or if oncoming
drivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim). If you believe your headlamps need to
be re-aimed, we recommend that you take your
vehicle to your retailer for service.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your retailer.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps
To replace a headlamp or sidemarker bulb, do the
following:
for more information.
4. Rotate the sidemarker bulb socket counterclockwise
and remove it from the housing.
5. Replace with a new bulb.
If you need to change a headlamp bulb, continue to
follow these directions. If not, reinstall the lamp
assembly by reversing the Steps 1 through 3.
2. Remove the sidemarker fasteners.
6. Remove the sidemarker housing to access the
headlamp assembly.
3. Remove the sidemarker lamp from the body of the
vehicle.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Remove the fasteners from the headlamp assembly.
8. Insert a flat blade tool through the opening in the
top. Make sure the tool fits through the opening in
the headlamp bracket lower arm.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Turn Signal and Parking
Lamps
To replace a front turn signal or parking lamp bulb, do
the following:
front turn signal or parking lamp.
2. Rotate the bulb to be replaced counterclockwise to
remove it from the headlamp housing.
3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket assembly.
9. Push the locking tab toward the rear of the vehicle
with the tool to lift the headlamp bracket lower arm.
10. Lift up the assembly.
11. Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb
assembly.
12. Rotate the bulb assembly counterclockwise to
remove it from the housing.
13. Replace the old bulb with a new one.
14. Reverse the steps to reinstall the headlamp and
sidemarker assembly.
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fog Lamps
To replace a fog lamp bulb, do the following:
1. Reach through opening in lower front fascia to gain
access to the fog lamp bulb electrical connector.
4. Push the new bulb into the bulb socket assembly.
5. Insert the bulb assembly into the headlamp housing.
6. Rotate the bulb assembly clockwise until seated.
7. Reverse the steps to reinstall the lamp assemblies.
2. Disconnect bulb electrical connector by lifting the
locking tab and pull it rearward to remove the
connector.
3. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise to
remove it.
4. Remove the bulb and replace it with the
appropriate bulb.
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Replace the old bulb with a new one.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
8. Align the tabs on the CHMSL lens with the CHMSL
bulb assembly, and push to install.
To replace a CHMSL bulb, do the following:
9. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to reinstall the CHMSL
assembly.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
1. Remove the taillamp fasteners from the body of the
vehicle.
2. Slide the taillamp
housing rearward and
away from the body
of the vehicle.
1. Remove the center high-mounted stoplamp
(CHMSL) fasteners.
2. Pull the CHMSL out of the liftgate.
3. Disconnect the rear washer hose from the rear
washer nozzle.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector from the
CHMSL assembly.
5. Depress the tabs on the CHMSL lens to separate
the CHMSL bulb from the CHMSL lens.
6. Pull the CHMSL bulb out of the assembly.
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Disconnect the taillamp housing electrical connector
and remove the taillamp housing.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Back-up Lamps
CHMSL
Fog Lamps
Front Sidemarker Lamps
Bulb Number
315609442003
W5W12092811
880C12450143
16809425542
Front Turn Signal/Parking Lamps 3457A1999370
Headlamps
9005
H6309441732
High-Beam
9006
HB409441733
Low-Beam
Rear Turn Signal Lamps
Stoplamps and Taillamps
305709441839
305709441839
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
retailer.
4. Turn the bulb socket being replaced
counterclockwise to disconnect it from the taillamp
housing.
5. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket.
6. Push the new bulb into the bulb socket.
7. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the taillamp
assembly.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear or cracking. See “Wiper Blade
for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
page 6-16.
Here’s how to replace the windshield wiper blades:
1. Turn the wipers on to the lowest intermittent setting.
4. Pull up the release clip, located at the connecting
point of the blade and the arm. Then, pull the
blade assembly down toward the glass to remove it
from the wiper arm.
2. Turn off the ignition while the wipers are at the
outer positions of the wipe pattern. The blades
are more accessible for removal/replacement while
in this position.
5. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper
arm until you hear the release clip click into place.
3. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield.
6. Push the release clip, from Step 4, down to secure
the wiper blade into place.
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace the backglass mounted wiper blade, do the
following:
{CAUTION:
1. Turn the rear wiper off.
2. Pull the wiper away from the backglass.
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Loading Your
3. Pull up the release clip, located at the connecting
point of the blade and the arm. Then, pull the
blade assembly down toward the glass to remove it
from the wiper arm.
4. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper
arm until you hear the release clip click into place.
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold. See Inflation -
5. Push the release clip, from Step 3, down to secure
the wiper blade into place.
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your Saturn Warranty booklet for details. For
additional information refer to the tire manufacturer’s
booklet included with your vehicle’s owner manual.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut,
punctured or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
Tire Sidewall Labelling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical passenger
vehicle tire and a compact spare tire sidewall.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT (Department of Transportation)
code is the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The
TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size,
and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance. For more information see
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters
and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width,
height, aspect ratio, construction type and service
description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification Number
(TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code,
tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The
TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although only
one side may have the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
For more information on tire pressure and inflation see
Compact Spare Tire Example
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers
define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type and service description. The letter T as the
first character in the tire size means the tire is for
temporary use only.
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven
at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire
has lost air and gone flat. If your vehicle has a compact
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter
R means radial ply construction; the letter D means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means
belted-bias ply construction.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a typical
passenger vehicle tire size.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters represent
the load range and speed rating of the tire. The load
index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified
to carry. The load index can range from 1 to 279. The
speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified
to carry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the
first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if
the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as shown in item C of the
illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
60 percent as high as it is wide.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to its
width.
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of
a tire.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle
safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator
which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production
plant, brand and date of production.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire
that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or
bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on
the other sidewall of the tire.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tire
when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains. See
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards): A
tire information system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are molded
into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-46.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and
the original equipment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the
vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’s
door latch. This label shows your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressures for
your tires when they are cold. The recommended
cold tire inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the
minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate
effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.
If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),
you can get the following:
For additional information regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire
and loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-46. How you load your vehicle affects
vehicle handling and ride comfort, never load your
vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
When to Check
• Reduced fuel economy
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not forget to
check the compact spare tire, it should be at 60 psi
(420 kPa). For additional information regarding
page 5-83.
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), you
can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Check the tire’s inflation pressure when the tires
are cold. Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for
at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile
(1.6 km).
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
on page 5-67 for more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading
Information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If
the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
When towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground, the vehicle’s odometer will not record the miles
generated while towing. Keep a record of how many
miles your vehicle was towed so they can be added to
the mileage on the vehicle’s odometer when following
your maintenance schedule for recommended services.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Re-check the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and
moisture.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened.
See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
page 5-70.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
Do not include the compact spare tire in your tire
rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and
page 4-46.
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When It Is Time for New Tires
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires your vehicle
needs, look at the tire and loading information label. For
more information about this label and its location on
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a
Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
GM recommends that you get tires with that same TPC
Spec number. That way your vehicle will continue to have
tires that are designed to give proper endurance,
handling, speed rating, load range, traction, ride and
other things during normal service on your vehicle. If your
tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC number
will be followed by an “MS” (for mud and snow).
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
{CAUTION:
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use the same size and type tires on
all wheels. It’s all right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, it was developed
for use on your vehicle. See Compact Spare
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear
Temperature – A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new Saturn
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the
longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will
not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if
you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to
one side or the other, the alignment may need to
be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, your tires and wheels
may need to be rebalanced. See your retailer for proper
diagnosis.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
Your retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
information.
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Used Replacement Wheels
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used
or how far it’s been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new Saturn original
equipment wheel.
If your vehicle has P235/65R16, P235/60R17 or
245/50R18 size tires, do not use tire chains,
there is not enough clearance.
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can cause damage
to the brakes, suspension or other vehicle
parts. The area damaged by the tire chains
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle
and you or others may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin your wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the front tires.
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other than
P235/65R16, P235/60R17 or 245/50R18 size tires, use
tire chains only where legal and only when you
must. Use only SAE Class “S” type chains that are
the proper size for your tires. Install them on the
front tires and tighten them as tightly as possible
with the ends securely fastened. Drive slowly
and follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions. If
you can hear the chains contacting your vehicle,
stop and retighten them. If the contact continues,
slow down until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning
the wheels with chains on will damage your
vehicle.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
If a Tire Goes Flat
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air
goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here are
a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing a Flat Tire
CAUTION: (Continued)
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
{CAUTION:
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transaxle shift lever in
PARK (P), or shift a manual transaxle to
FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you have a flat tire, use the following example as a
guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you will
need is located on the
driver’s side of the
rear cargo area.
The following information will tell you how to use the
jack and change a tire.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To access the equipment, do the following:
2. Remove the forward floor panel of the load floor
cargo organizer and place it in the vehicle while
you are removing the spare tire.
1. Lift the forward floor panel of the load floor cargo
organizer.
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Open the floor cargo organizer locks, located on the
top left and right corners of the organizer, by
pushing inward on them.
4. Remove the load floor cargo organizer.
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Remove the straps holding the bag containing the
wheel wrench, then remove the wheel wrench from
the bag.
10. Fold out the socket portion of the wrench from the
handle.
5. Remove the wheel retainer bolt holding down the
spare tire.
7. Remove the wing-bolt from the jack.
8. Remove the jack and wheel wrench.
The tools you will be using include the jack (A) and
wheel wrench (B).
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When reinstalling full plastic covers or center caps,
tighten all plastic caps hand snug with the aid of
the wheel wrench and tighten them with the wheel
wrench an additional one-quarter of a turn.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
You will need to remove the wheel cover or hubcap to
reach the wheel bolts.
1. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts.
Do not remove them yet.
For steel wheels with full plastic covers and aluminum
wheels with large circular center caps, do the following:
2. Attach the wheel
wrench to the jack bolt
head and rotate the
wheel wrench
1. Loosen all plastic caps
by turning the wheel
wrench
clockwise. That will
raise the lift head
a little.
counterclockwise. Do
not try to remove
plastic caps from the
cover or center cap.
2. Pull the cover or center cap away from the wheel
and place it in the trunk.
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only by
a jack.
{CAUTION:
3. Position the lift head at the jack location nearest the
flat tire. Make sure all of the jack lift head is
touching the jacking flange under the body. Do not
place the jack under a body panel. The lower
body panel has an arrow to aid in locating the
jacking location.
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
4. Put the compact spare tire near you.
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the road tire to
be removed.
Notice: Make sure that the jack lift head is in the
correct position or you may damage your vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Remove all of the
wheel nuts.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt off.
7. Take off the flat tire.
8. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Place the compact spare tire on the wheel-mounting
surface.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
10. Reinstall the wheel nuts. Tighten each nut by hand
until the wheel is held against the hub.
11. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
{CAUTION:
sequence, as shown.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
torque specification.
13. Lower the jack all the way and remove the jack
from under the vehicle.
14. Tighten the bolts firmly with the wheel wrench.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your compact
spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact
spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
specification.
Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare
tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover in the trunk
until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced.
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
To store the flat or spare tire and tools, do the following:
3. Remove the wheel stow rod from the upper left side
of the floor compartment.
1. Place the wheel wrench into the bag and use the
straps to secure the bag to the jack.
4. Screw the threaded wheel stow rod onto the spare
tire bracket. The final position of the wheel stow rod
must be rotated to the farthest forward position
so that the top of the rod faces forward.
2. Install the jack in the
driver’s side panel of
the rear cargo area and
secure with the
wing bolt.
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
floor cargo organizer and lock in place.
Vehicles equipped with the 3.5L V6 (L66) engine
and aluminum wheels, must remove the center cap
from the wheel prior to placing it on the load
floor. To remove the center cap, tap the cap for the
backside of the wheel, then place the wheel on
the load floor.
6. Place the flat, or damaged tire, face down, on the
load floor with the threaded wheel stow rod sticking
up through the center hole of the wheel.
7. Place the wheel retainer bolt onto the wheel stow
rod and tighten.
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon
as you can. See the storage instructions label to replace
your compact spare into your cargo area properly.
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get
caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and
wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, stop
as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire
is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to
perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h)
for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can
finish your trip and have the full-size tire repaired or
replaced at your convenience. Of course, it is best
to replace the spare with a full-size tire as soon as
possible. The spare tire will last longer and be in good
shape in case it is needed again.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the
spare tire and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on
your compact spare.
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not use any of these products unless this manual
says you can. In many uses, these will damage
the vehicle:
Appearance Care
Cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic.
Other cleaning products can burst into flames if a match
is struck near them or if they get on a hot part of the
vehicle. Some are dangerous if their fumes are inhaled
in an enclosed space. When anything from a container
is used to clean the vehicle, be sure to follow the
manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. Always open
the doors or windows of the vehicle when cleaning
the inside.
• Alcohol
• Laundry Soap
• Bleach
• Reducing Agents
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Never use these to clean the vehicle:
• Benzene
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if
it is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can
damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces.
Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles
from your upholstery. It is important to keep your
upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. Your
vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of heat
that could cause stains to set rapidly.
• Naphtha
• Carbon Tetrachloride
• Acetone
• Paint Thinner
• Turpentine
• Lacquer Thinner
• Nail Polish Remover
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
They can all be hazardous — some more than
others — and they can all damage the vehicle, too.
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
or techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure
can damage your interior and does not improve the
effectiveness of soil removal.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on your
vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
Using too much soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a
good guide.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your GM dealer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For soils, always
try to remove them first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as
possible using one of the following techniques:
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of your
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in
a non-uniform manner.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
Washing Your Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Care of Safety Belts
Do not wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. You can get
approved cleaning products from your retailer.
Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum
based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning
agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed
to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish
with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
Weatherstrips
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required. See
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
page 5-87.
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get approved cleaning products
from your Saturn retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap, or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass
cleaning liquid or powder and water solution. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when it is rinsed
with water.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as
possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners on
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Do not take the vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Tires
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because the surface could be damaged. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sheet Metal Damage
Underbody Maintenance
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and
exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your Saturn retailer or an underbody car washing
system can do this for you.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your Saturn retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your Saturn
retailer’s body and paint shop.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and
small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, Saturn
will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces
of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches and other light
surface contamination.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one easy step,
no wiping necessary.
Description
Usage
Swirl Remover Polish
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Cleaner Wax
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil and
asphalt.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Glass Cleaner
Quickly and easily
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner
removes spots and stains
from carpets, vinyl, and
cloth upholstery.
Spot Lifter
Removes dust,
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather, and carpet.
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
wipe off.
Finish Enhancer
Odor Eliminator
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification
The eighth character in your VIN is the engine code.
This code will help you identify your engine,
specifications and replacement parts.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label on the rear edge of the driver’s
side rear door. It is very helpful if you ever need to order
parts. On this label, you will find the following:
• VIN
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
5-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Circuit breakers in the fuse panel protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the current
load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and
closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they
should.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by fuses. This greatly reduces the chance
of circuit overload and fire caused by electrical
problems.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
There are two fuse blocks — the underhood fuse block,
and the instrument panel fuse block.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
To identify and check fuses and relays, refer to the
Fuse Usage Chart on the inside surface of the
fuse panel door.
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow or ice, the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
have it fixed.
5-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Fuses
CRUISE
EPS
Usage
Cruise Control Switch, Brake Switch
Electronic Power Steering
Instrument Cluster, BTSI Solenoid,
Traction Switch, Fog Lamp Switch
IGN 1
LOCK/MIRROR
BCM
Power Door Locks, Power Mirror,
Entry Control
Body Control Module, Front Wipers,
Windows, Sunroof
BCM (IGN 1) Body Control Module
AIR BAG
RADIO (IGN)
TURN
SDM Module
Radio, Power Mirror, Premium
Radio Amplifier
Turn Lamps
The instrument panel fuse block is located on the
passenger’s side of the lower console.
5-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
HVAC
Usage
HVAC Control Head
Hazard Lamps
Relays
Usage
AFTER BLOW Afterblow
HVAC
BLOWER
HAZARD
HVAC Control Head
HTD SEATS Heated Seats
PK LP
Parking Lamps
RADIO
Radio, Data Link Connector
DR LCK
All Door Lock Switch
Park Lamps, Taillamps, Side Marker
Lamps, License Lamps
PARK
PSG DR
UNLCK
Passenger Door Unlock Switch
Body Control Module, Instrument
Cluster
Body Control Module, OnStar®
BCM/CLUSTER
DRV DR
UNLCK
Driver Door Unlock Switch
Headlamps
INT LTS
DR LKS
HDLP
Door Locks
5-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Underhood Fuse Block
Fuses
Usage
Battery Voltage to ECM, TCM,
PCM (3.5L V6 (L66))
ECM/TCM
BATT FEED I/P Fuse Box
HORN
Horn
ABS PWR
ABS Battery
REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger
COOL HI (L4)/ Cooling Fans High (L4)/Cooling
COOL 1 (V6) Fan 1 (V6)
FOG LP
LH HDLP
RR WIPER
ABS
Fog Lamps
Left Headlamp
Rear Wiper
ABS Module
The underhood fuse block is located in the forward part
of the engine compartment near the battery.
PWR WDW Power Window Relay and Sunroof
CIGAR/AUX2 Cigarette Lighter
5-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
HVAC Blower Motor
Right Headlamp
Fuses
Usage
HVAC
BLOWER
Engine Control Module (ECM),
PWR TRAIN Transmission Control Module
(TCM), Transmission
RH HDLP
Low Coolant Switch, Backup Lamps
(2.2L L4 (L61)), Vehicle Speed
Sensor (Manual), Transmission
Range Switch (2.2L L4 (L61))
FRT WIPER Front Wiper
BACKUP
Engine Control Module (ECM),
ETC (2.2L)
Electronic Throttle Control
Sunroof Module
Stop Lamps
SUNROOF
BRAKE
IGN
HTD SEATS Heated Seats
COOL LO (L4)/ Cooling Fan Low (L4), Cooling
COOL 2 (V6) Fan (V6)
Ignition switch
A/C Clutch, Back Up Lamps
A/C CLUTCH
Engine Ignition Module, Fuel
Injectors (2.2L L4 (L61))
Camshaft Sensor, Main Relay
Voltage To PCM, Ignition Coils 1-6
IGN/INJ (L4),
ECM/
CAM (V6)
(3.5L V6 (L66))
FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump
AUX 1
Front Auxiliary Power Outlet
OUTLET
INJECTORS
(3.5L V6 (L66))
Fuel Injection
PREM AUD Premium Radio Amplifier
ABS
ABS Ignition
PWR SEAT Power Seats
5-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relays
Usage
Relays
Usage
FOG LP
Fog Lamps
FRT WIPER Front Wiper System
COOL FAN
HI (L4)
COOL FAN
Cooling Fan Motor High
Cooling Fan Motor Low
LOW (L4)
ENG MAIN
ECM/CAM, EMISS, INJ, ETC
A/C CLUTCH A/C Clutch
REAR DEFOG Rear Defog System
BACKUP
Back-up Lamps (V6)
LAMPS (V6)
HORN
DRL
Horn
FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump System
Daytime Running Lamps
RR WIPER
Rear Wiper System
COOL
FAN 1 (V6)
Cooling Fan
COOL
FAN 2 (V6)
Cooling Fan (V6)
WIPER
SYSTEM
Wiper System
Power Window Switch, Sunroof
Module
Misc.
Usage
PRW WDO
FUSE PULLER Fuse Puller
Diode Air Conditioning Diode
5-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
2.2L L4 (L61)
1.5 lbs
1.8 lbs
0.68 kg
0.79 kg
3.5L V6 (L66)
Cooling System
2.2L L4 (L61)
3.5L V6 (L66)
7.4 quarts
9.7 quarts
7.0 L
9.2 L
Engine Oil with Filter
2.2L L4 (L61)
5.0 quarts
4.5 quarts
4.7 L
4.3 L
3.5L V6 (L66)
Fuel Tank
16.5 gallons
62.4 L
Transaxle
Five-SpeedAutomatic (RPO MJ7)
Five-Speed Automatic Red Line Model (RPO MJ8)
Four-Speed Automatic (RPO MN5)
Five-Speed Manual (RPO MG3)
VTi Variable (RPO M75 and M16)
Wheel Nut Torque
4.5 quarts
4.1 quarts
7.0 quarts
1.8 quarts
7.0 quarts
92 ft lb
4.3 L
3.9 L
6.6 L
1.7 L
6.6 L
125 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
5-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
0.045 inches (1.14 mm)
0.043 inches (1.1 mm)
Automatic
Manual
2.2L L4 (L61)
3.5L V6 (L66)
F
U
Automatic
5-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Maintenance Schedule
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep your vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance may not be covered by
warranty.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We at Saturn want to help you keep your vehicle in good
working condition. But we do not know exactly how
you will drive it. You may drive very short distances only
a few times a week. Or you may drive long distances
all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You may
use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive
it to work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your Saturn retailer.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your retailer to have a qualified technician
do the work. See Doing Your Own Service
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-46.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• are driven off-road in the recommended manner.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your Saturn
retailer do these jobs.
on page 5-5.
When you go to your Saturn retailer for your service
needs, you will know that Saturn-trained and supported
service technicians will perform the work using
genuine Saturn parts.
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
what should be checked, when to check it and what you
can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
When the Change Engine Oil light appears, certain
services, checks, and inspections are required. Required
services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally, it is
recommended that your first service be Maintenance I,
your second service be Maintenance II, and that you
alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.
However, in some cases, Maintenance II may be
required more often.
The proper replacement parts, fluids and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine Saturn parts.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the Change
Engine Oil light comes on within 10 months since
the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was
performed.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the Change Engine Oil light comes on, it means
that service is required for your vehicle. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the engine oil life
system may not indicate that vehicle service is
necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your Saturn retailer
has Saturn-trained service technicians who will
perform this work using genuine Saturn parts and reset
the system.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the light comes on 10 months
or more since the last service or if the light has not
come on at all for one year.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
Service.
•
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
page 6-11.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (k).
L4 engine: Inspect throttle system. See footnote (g).
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(83 000) (125 000) (166 000) (207 500) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or
leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
L4 engine: Change 4-speed automatic
transaxle fluid (severe service). See
footnote (h).
•
•
•
L4 engine: Change 4-speed automatic
transaxle fluid (normal service).
•
•
VTi variable transaxle: Add DEX-CVT
additive.
•
•
•
•
L4 engine: Change VTi variable
transaxle fluid (severe service). See
footnote (h).
•
•
L4 engine: Change VTi variable
transaxle fluid (normal service).
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(83 000) (125 000) (166 000) (207 500) (240 000)
V6 engine: Change automatic transaxle
fluid (severe service). See footnote (h).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
V6 engine: Change automatic transaxle
fluid (normal service). See footnote (m).
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
Control Service.
V6 engine: Replace timing belt (normal
service). An Emission Control Service.
See footnote †.
•
•
•
•
V6 engine: Replace timing belt (severe
service). An Emission Control Service.
See footnotes † and (n).
•
•
•
•
L4 engine: Change rear drive module
and power takeoff unit fluid (severe
service). See footnote (h).
L4 engine: Change rear drive module
and power takeoff unit fluid (normal
service).
V6 engine: Change transfer assembly
fluid (severe service). See footnote (h).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
V6 engine: Change transfer assembly
fluid (normal service). See footnote (m).
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(83 000) (125 000) (166 000) (207 500) (240 000)
V6 engine: Change rear drive module
fluid (severe service). See footnote (h).
•
•
•
V6 engine: Change rear drive module
fluid (normal service).
•
•
V6 engine: Inspect valve clearance.
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first). An
Emission Control Service. See
footnote (i).
•
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An
Emission Control Service. See
footnote (p).
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace wiper blades that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
Maintenance Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced.
maintenance be recorded.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect drum brake linings/shoes for wear or
cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including drums,
wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, door hinges and
latches, hood hinges and latches, glove box hinges,
sunroof (if equipped), and any folding seat hardware.
More frequent lubrication may be required when
exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying silicone
grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make
them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear.
(g) Check system for interference or binding and
for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed.
Replace any components that have high effort or
excessive wear.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect
all pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace with genuine
Saturn parts as needed. To help ensure proper
operation, a pressure test of the cooling system and
pressure cap and cleaning the outside of the radiator
and air conditioning condenser is recommended at least
once a year.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(h) Severe service is when the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
(k) Or every 12 months, whichever occurs first. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may
require replacement more often.
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
(m) Change the fluid the first time the vehicle is serviced
after 100,000 miles (166 000 km) and when the
vehicle is serviced after each subsequent 50,000 miles
(83 000 km).
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your retailer perform
what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the
cooling system and pressure cap.
(n) Severe service is when the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
− In very high temperatures — over 110°F (43°C).
− In very low temperatures — under -20°F (-29°C).
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(p) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Owner Checks and Services
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-26 for further details.
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your Saturn retailer can assist you with these
checks and services.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
At Each Fuel Fill
Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they
are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to
details. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
details.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
page 5-62.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle should start only when the clutch pedal is
pushed down all the way to the floor. If the vehicle
starts when the clutch is not pushed all the way
down, contact your Saturn retailer for service.
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. On automatic transaxle vehicles, try to start the
engine in each gear. The vehicle should start
only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle
starts in any other position, contact your Saturn
retailer for service.
on page 2-24.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN, but do
not start the engine. Without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
On manual transaxle vehicles, put the shift lever in
NEUTRAL, push the clutch pedal down halfway,
and try to start the engine.
of PARK (P), contact your Saturn retailer for service.
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever position.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular
brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the
parking brake only.
• With an automatic transaxle, the ignition should turn
to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK (P).
The key should come out only in LOCK.
• With a manual transaxle, the key should come out
only in LOCK.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Contact your Saturn retailer if service is required.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Park (P) Mechanism Check
Contact your Saturn retailer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
{CAUTION:
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
page 5-26.
Engine Coolant
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification may be obtained from
your retailer.
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
Washer
Optikleen® Washer Solvent
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®
oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
Engine Oil
(2.2L L4
engine)
Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid
(Saturn Part No. 21013073).
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid. Look for
“Approved for the H-Specification”
on the label.
Hydraulic
Clutch System
page 5-15.
Engine oil which displays the
American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®
oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
page 5-15.
Manual
Transaxle
Engine Oil
(3.5L V6
engine)
Automatic
Transaxle (with
3.5L V6 engine)
VTi Variable
Transaxle
ATF Z1 Automatic Transmission
Fluid (Saturn Part No. 22717466).
DEX-CVT Fluid
(Part No. 22688912).
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
VTi Variable
Transaxle
Additive
Rear Drive
Module and
Power Transfer
Unit (except
with 3.5L V6
engine)
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring
Anchor, and
Release Pawl
Hood, Liftgate
Door, and rear
folding seat
Hinges
DEX-CVT Fluid Additive
(Part No. 22697447).
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(Saturn Part No. 21038869 or GM
Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
VERSATRAK® Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 12378514, in
Canada 88901045).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Rear Drive
VERSATRAK® Fluid
Module (with (GM Part No. U.S. 12378514, in
3.5L V6 engine) Canada 88901045).
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(Saturn Part No. 21038869 or GM
Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in
Canada 992887).
Transfer Case Synthetic Axle Lubricant
(with 3.5L V6 (GM Part No. U.S. 12378261, in
Sunroof Track
engine)
Canada 10953455).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Key Lock
Cylinders
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your retailer.
Part
Saturn Part Number
ACDelco® Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
2.2L L4
22676970
—
12579143
12582255
22665802
—
—
—
3.5L V6
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element
Spark Plugs
2.2L L4
3.5L V6
12569190
12582002
—
—
Wiper Blades
Driver’s Side – 24 inches (60.0 cm)
Passenger’s Side – 19 inches (47.5 cm)
Rear – 11.0 inches (28.0 cm)
22703502
—
22665009
8–2241
8–2191
—
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-11 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP TWO: Should you need additional assistance,
contact the Saturn Customer Assistance Center by
calling 1-800-553-6000. In Canada, contact the Saturn
Customer Communication Centre at 1-800-263-1999.
A Saturn Customer Assistance Center team member will
handle your call and assist in providing product and
warranty information, the nearest retailer location,
roadside assistance, brochures, literature and discuss
any concerns you may have.
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your retailer and to Saturn. Together we are committed
to providing our customers with unparalleled service,
before, during and after the purchase of a Saturn
vehicle, for total customer satisfaction. We call this the
Saturn Difference. Normally, any concerns with the
sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be
resolved by your retailer’s sales or service departments.
If, for any reason, your ownership experience falls
below your expectations, we suggest you take
the following action:
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number. This 17-digit number
can be found on the vehicle registration or title, on
the upper driver’s side corner of the dash, or on
your roadside assistance key card.
STEP ONE: Contact the Retail Customer Assistance
Liaison. Any member of the retail management team has
the authority and the desire to resolve your concerns.
Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at this level.
• The name of your selling and servicing retail facility.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
• Your daytime and evening phone numbers.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you wish to write to the Saturn Customer Assistance
Center, our address is:
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. This program is available at no cost to
you, our customer.
Saturn Customer Assistance Center
100 Saturn Parkway
Mail Code 371-999-S24 Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500
We ask that you not resort to BBB Auto Line until after
Saturn and its retailers have been given the opportunity
to satisfy your vehicle concerns. However, U.S.
residents may file a claim at any time by contacting your
local Better Business Bureau at 1-800-955-5100.
In Canada, write to:
Saturn Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Ltd.
1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court
action, use of the program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not
agree with the decision given in your case, you may
reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief
available to you.
When contacting Saturn, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved at a retailer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if
you have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both Saturn and its retailers are
committed to making sure you are completely satisfied
with your Saturn vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, Saturn and its retailers
offer the additional assistance of a neutral party
through our voluntary participation in a
mediation/arbitration program called BBB Auto Line.
Canadian owners refer to your Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information booklet, located in the front cover
pocket of your owner’s handbook, for information on
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program by using
the toll-free telephone number or by writing them at
the following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. Saturn Corporation reserves
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out-of-court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Online Owner Center
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
The Owner Center is a resource for your ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in one
place.
To assist owners who have hearing difficulties, Saturn
has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices
for the Deaf) equipment in its Saturn Customer
Assistance Center.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
Any hearing- or speech-impaired customer who has
access to a TDD or to a conventional Text Telephone
(TTY) can communicate with Saturn by dialing
1-800-TDD-6000. TTY users in Canada may dial
1-800-263-3830.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner manual (United States only).
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history
and maintenance schedule.
• Find Saturn retailers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members (United States only).
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit My Saturn within
www.saturn.com (United States) or My GM Canada
within www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Roadside Assistance Program
For vehicles purchased in the U.S. call 1-800-553-6000
(TTY: 1-800-833-6000).
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligible aftermarket
driver or passenger adaptive equipment you may
require for your vehicle such as hand controls,
wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.
For vehicles purchased in Canada call 1-800-268-6800.
As the proud owner of a new Saturn vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Saturn Roadside
Assistance Program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive
in the city or travel the open road. Saturn’s Roadside
Assistance toll-free number is staffed by courteous and
capable Roadside Assistance Representatives who
are available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
The offer is available for a limited period of time from
the date of vehicle purchase/lease.
For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s
eligibility, visit your Saturn retailer or call the Saturn
Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-553-6000. Text
telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-6000.
In Canada, customers may call the Saturn Customer
Communication Centre at 1-800-263-1999. TTY users in
Canada may call 1-800-263-3830.
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
We will provide the following services during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period at no expense
to you:
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representatives:
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
($5 maximum) for the customer to get to the
nearest service station.
• Lock-out Service (identification required):
Replacement keys or locksmith service will
be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain
entry into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement
key will be covered within 10 miles (16 km).
• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest Saturn
retailer for warranty service or in the event of
a vehicle-disabling accident. Assistance provided
when the vehicle is mired in sand, mud, or snow.
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
• Model, year, color, and license plate number
• Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number and delivery
date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our
service, it is added security while traveling for you
and your family. Remember we are only a phone call
away. Saturn Roadside Assistance: 1-800-553-6000;
text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-6000.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will be
covered at no charge. (The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not
covered by a warrantable failure.)
Saturn reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in Saturn’s
judgment, the claims become excessive in frequency
or type of occurrence.
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a
battery jump start will be covered at no charge.
• Saturn Retailer Locator Service
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Saturn reserves the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any
time without notification.
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under Saturn’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty. However,
when other services are utilized, our Roadside
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the Airbag
Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehicle
may record information about the condition of the vehicle
and how it was operated, such as data related to
engine speed, brake application, throttle position, vehicle
speed, safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag
performance, and the severity of a collision. This
information has been used to improve vehicle crash
performance and may be used to improve crash
performance of future vehicles and driving safety. Unlike
the data recorders on many airplanes, these on-board
systems do not record sounds, such as conversation of
vehicle occupants.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive Saturn
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor
emission control components to optimize fuel economy,
to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the
driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash event by
computer systems, such as those commonly called event
data recorders (EDR).
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the device that stores
the data is required. GM will not access information
about a crash event or share it with others other than:
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs,
Reporting Safety Defects
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
Saturn Corporation.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please check
the OnStar® subscription service agreement or
manual for information on its operations and data
collection.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your retailer or
Saturn Corporation.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263–1999. Or,
write to:
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Saturn Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may call them at
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Transport Canada
Place de Ville Tower C
330 Sparks Street
Service Manuals
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
A variety of publications are available to you. Saturn
service manuals are written for trained technicians, and
in some cases, specialized tools and equipment are
necessary to complete certain repairs. However,
the manuals are available to owners who either have
the training, or wish to gain a greater understanding of
the technical aspect of their Saturn.
Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
U.S. customers can call the Saturn Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-553-6000, or write:
For additional publications information or to order
publications, call toll free 1-800-2-SATURN or visit
win.wallace.com/saturn to order on-line.
Saturn Corporation
100 Saturn Parkway
Mail Drop 371-999-S24
Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500
In Canada, Saturn service manuals are available by
calling toll free 1-800-551-4123.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner Publications
Service Bulletins
Information on how to obtain product bulletins and as
described below is applicable only in the fifty U.S. states
and the District of Columbia, and only for cars and
light trucks with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
less than 10,000 pounds (4 536 kg). Copies of
individual bulletins are also at your participating Saturn
retailer. You can ask to see them.
Saturn regularly sends its retailers useful service
bulletins about Saturn products. Saturn monitors product
performance in the field. We then prepare bulletins for
servicing our products better. You can get these
bulletins, too.
Bulletins cover various subjects. Some pertain to the
proper use and care of your vehicle. Some describe
costly repairs. Others describe inexpensive repairs
which, if done on time with the latest parts, may avoid
future costly repairs.
In Canada, information relating to product service
bulletins can be obtained by contacting your Saturn
retailer.
Some bulletins tell a technician how to repair a new or
unexpected condition. Others describe a quicker
way to fix your vehicle. They can help a technician
service your vehicle better.
Most bulletins apply to conditions affecting a small
number of vehicles. Your Saturn retailer or a qualified
technician may have to determine if a specific
bulletin applies to your vehicle. To order Saturn bulletins,
call Saturn Publications at 1-800-2-SATURN or visit
win.wallace.com/saturn to order online.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio System(s) (cont.)
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning (cont.)
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Electrical System (cont.)
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-40
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-15
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats (cont.)
S
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires (cont.)
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-23
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
